Ricoh Ld435C Users Manual
LD435c to the manual d466694a-8627-40bc-8e22-c649699b3ed3
2015-01-23
: Ricoh Ricoh-Ld435C-Users-Manual-274598 ricoh-ld435c-users-manual-274598 ricoh pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 325 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- General Settings Guide
- Introduction
- Important
- Notes:
- Manuals for This Machine
- TABLE OF CONTENTS
- How to Read This Manual
- Display Panel
- Accessing User Tools
- 1. Connecting the Machine
- Connecting to the Interfaces
- Network Settings
- Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax
- Settings Required to Use Internet Fax
- Settings Required to Use E-mail Function
- Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function
- Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner
- Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner
- Settings Required to Use Document Server
- Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
- Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
- 2. System Settings
- 3. Copier / Document Server Features
- 4. Facsimile Features
- General Features
- Scan Settings
- Send Settings
- Reception Settings
- Initial Settings
- Reception File Setting
- Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
- Registering Fax Information
- Forwarding
- Parameter Settings
- Special Senders to Treat Differently
- Authorized Reception
- Reception File Print Quantity
- Forwarding
- Print 2 Sided
- Memory Lock
- Paper Tray
- Programming/Changing Special Senders
- Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
- Reception File Print Qty
- Forwarding
- Print 2 Sided
- Memory Lock
- Paper Tray per Sender
- Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender
- Deleting a Special Sender
- Box Settings
- 5. Printer Features
- 6. Scanner Features
- 7. Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
- Address Book
- Registering Names
- Authentication Information
- Fax Destination
- Fax Destination
- IP-Fax Destination
- Registering an IP-Fax Destination
- Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination
- Using the IP–Fax Destination as the sender
- To change the IP-Fax Destination
- To select the protocol
- To program the SUB Code
- To program the SEP Code
- To set the International TX Mode
- To select the fax header
- Deleting a Registered IP-Fax Destination
- E-mail Destination
- Registering Folders
- Registering Names to a Group
- Registering a Protection Code
- Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
- 8. Other User Tools
- 9. Appendix
- INDEX
Operating Instructions
General Settings Guide
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Connecting the Machine
System Settings
Copier / Document Server Features
Facsimile Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
Other User Tools
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-
chine before reading this manual.
• Type 1: C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500
• Type 2: C4540/C4540g/DSc545/DSc545g/LD445c/Aficio MP C4500/Aficio MP C4500G
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
i
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
❖About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as register-
ing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.
❖Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security func-
tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
❖Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
❖Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environ-
ment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
ii
❖Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
•UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
•Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒"PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display Panel..........................................................................................................2
Accessing User Tools ...........................................................................................3
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................3
Quitting User Tools ....................................................................................................4
Menu Protect..............................................................................................................4
1. Connecting the Machine
Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................5
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................6
Connecting to the USB Interface................................................................................8
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface......................................................................9
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................10
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................11
Network Settings..................................................................................................14
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax ........................................................14
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax .....................................................................17
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ...............................................................21
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function ..................................................25
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................28
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................31
Settings Required to Use Document Server ............................................................33
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings .................................................................36
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ........................45
Connecting the Telephone Line ...............................................................................45
Selecting the Line Type............................................................................................45
2. System Settings
General Features..................................................................................................47
Output tray settings ..................................................................................................50
Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................51
Timer Settings......................................................................................................57
Interface Settings.................................................................................................59
Network ....................................................................................................................59
Parallel Interface ......................................................................................................63
IEEE 1394 ................................................................................................................64
IEEE 802.11b ...........................................................................................................66
Print List ...................................................................................................................67
File Transfer .........................................................................................................69
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................76
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server ................................................................84
Programming the LDAP server ................................................................................85
iv
3. Copier / Document Server Features
General Features..................................................................................................91
Reproduction Ratio..............................................................................................96
Edit ......................................................................................................................100
Stamp ..................................................................................................................106
Background Numbering .........................................................................................106
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................107
User Stamp ............................................................................................................110
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................111
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................113
Input/Output .......................................................................................................116
Adjust Color Image ............................................................................................119
Settings for the Document Server....................................................................120
4. Facsimile Features
General Features................................................................................................121
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................124
Send Settings .....................................................................................................125
Reception Settings ............................................................................................128
Initial Settings ....................................................................................................134
Reception File Setting .......................................................................................139
Reception Report e-mail ........................................................................................140
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size ..............................................................141
Deleting a scan size ...............................................................................................143
Registering Fax Information .............................................................................144
Registering Fax Information...................................................................................145
Changing Fax Information......................................................................................147
Deleting Fax Information ........................................................................................147
Forwarding .........................................................................................................148
Programming an End Receiver ..............................................................................149
Quitting the forwarding function .............................................................................151
Forwarding Mark ....................................................................................................151
Parameter Settings ............................................................................................152
Changing the User Parameters..............................................................................158
Special Senders to Treat Differently ................................................................159
Authorized Reception.............................................................................................160
Reception File Print Quantity .................................................................................161
Forwarding .............................................................................................................161
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................161
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................162
Paper Tray .............................................................................................................162
Programming/Changing Special Senders ..............................................................163
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception) ..................................................................165
Reception File Print Qty .........................................................................................165
Forwarding .............................................................................................................166
Print 2 Sided...........................................................................................................167
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................167
Paper Tray per Sender...........................................................................................167
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender....................................................168
Deleting a Special Sender......................................................................................171
v
Box Settings .......................................................................................................172
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes ...............................................................172
Deleting Personal Boxes........................................................................................175
Programming/Changing Information Boxes ...........................................................176
Deleting Information Boxes ....................................................................................179
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes................................................................180
Deleting Transfer Boxes.........................................................................................183
Printing the Box List ...............................................................................................184
5. Printer Features
Test Print ............................................................................................................185
Printing the configuration page ..............................................................................186
Maintenance .......................................................................................................188
System ................................................................................................................189
Host Interface .....................................................................................................193
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................194
PS Menu..............................................................................................................196
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................197
6. Scanner Features
General Settings ................................................................................................199
Scan Settings .....................................................................................................201
Send Settings .....................................................................................................203
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner
Functions
Address Book.....................................................................................................205
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................208
Sending fax by Quick Dial ......................................................................................208
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial .................................................................................208
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................209
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........209
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................209
Registering Names ............................................................................................210
Registering Names.................................................................................................210
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................212
Deleting a Registered Name ..................................................................................213
Authentication Information ...............................................................................214
Registering a User Code........................................................................................215
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................216
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................218
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................219
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................219
Printing the Counter for All Users...........................................................................221
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................222
Fax Destination ..................................................................................................223
Fax Destination ......................................................................................................225
IP-Fax Destination..................................................................................................231
vi
E-mail Destination..............................................................................................236
Registering an E-mail Destination..........................................................................236
Changing an E-mail Destination.............................................................................238
Deleting an E-mail Destination...............................................................................239
Registering Folders ...........................................................................................240
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................240
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................246
Using NCP to Connect ...........................................................................................251
Registering Names to a Group .........................................................................257
Registering a Group ...............................................................................................257
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................258
Adding a Group to Another Group .........................................................................260
Displaying Names Registered in a Group ..............................................................261
Removing a Name from a Group ...........................................................................262
Deleting a Group Within Another Group ................................................................263
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................265
Deleting a Group ....................................................................................................266
Registering a Protection Code .........................................................................267
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................267
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................269
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication..................................................270
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................270
LDAP Authentication ..............................................................................................272
8. Other User Tools
Maintenance .......................................................................................................275
Changing the Display Language ......................................................................276
Inquiry .................................................................................................................277
Counter ...............................................................................................................279
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................279
9. Appendix
Specifications for the Main Unit .......................................................................281
Specifications for Options ................................................................................286
Information about Installed Software...............................................................292
expat ......................................................................................................................292
NetBSD ..................................................................................................................292
Sablotron................................................................................................................294
JPEG LIBRARY .....................................................................................................295
SASL ......................................................................................................................295
MD4........................................................................................................................296
MD5........................................................................................................................296
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)...................................................................................................297
RSA BSAFE®.........................................................................................................297
Open SSL...............................................................................................................298
Open SSH ..............................................................................................................303
Open LDAP ............................................................................................................308
INDEX....................................................................................................... 310
1
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Ma-
chine.
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the ma-
chine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the "Safety
Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions
on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find fur-
ther relevant information.
[ ]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{ }
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
2
Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by lightly pressing them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
. Keys appearing as cannot be used.
Important
❒A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
To display the following screen, press the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the
User Tools menu, and then press [System Settings].
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how
to use the machine’s display panel.
1. The menu tabs for various set-
tings appear. To display the setting
you want to specify or change, press
the appropriate menu tab.
2. A list of settings appears. To spec-
ify or change a setting, press the ap-
propriate key in the list.
3. Press this to quit the User Tools
menu.
AQT006S
3
Accessing User Tools
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
Note
❒Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit
User Tools when you have finished.
❒Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} or {Clear
Modes} key is pressed.
❒Default settings are shown in bold type.
Reference
p.4 “Quitting User Tools”
Changing Default Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
Important
❒If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your ad-
ministrator.
APress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
BSelect the menu.
To change the System Settings, press [System Settings].
To change the Copier / Document Server Features, press [Copier / Document
Server Features].
To change the Facsimile Features, press [Facsimile Features].
To change the Printer Features, press [Printer Features].
To change the Scanner Features, press [Scanner Features].
To adjust color registration or gradation, press [Maintenance].
To change the language used on the display, press [Español].
To check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs, or to order consum-
ables, press [Inquiry].
To check the counter, press [Counter].
AQT007S
4
CSelect the user tool you want to change.
DChange settings by following instructions on the display, and then press
[OK].
Note
❒To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press
the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.47 “System Settings”
p.91 “Copier / Document Server Features”
p.121 “Facsimile Features”
p.185 “Printer Features”
p.199 “Scanner Features”
p.275 “Other User Tools”
Quitting User Tools
This section describes how to end User Tools.
APress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the
user tools. Menu Protect can be specified for each of the following user tools
menus.
• Copier / Document Server Features
• Facsimile Features
•Printer Features
• Scanner Features
For details, consult your administrator.
AQT007S
5
1. Connecting the Machine
This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify
the network settings.
Connecting to the Interfaces
This section explains how to identify the machine’s interface and connect the
machine according to the network environment.
1. IEEE 1394 ports (optional)
Ports for connecting the IEEE 1394 inter-
face cable
2. USB2.0 port
Port for connecting the USB2.0 interface
cable
3. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX cable
4. IEEE 1284 port (optional)
Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 inter-
face cable
5. Wireless LAN port (optional)
Port for using the wireless LAN
Note
❒You cannot install two or more of the
options below: IEEE 1394 interface
board, IEEE 1284 interface board,
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN
AQT002S
Connecting the Machine
6
1
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface
Connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.
Important
❒If the main power switch is on, turn it off.
AA ferrite core for the Ethernet cable is supplied with this machine. Make a
loop in the cable about 3cm (1.2 inch) (1) from the machine end of the cable.
Attach the ferrite core.
BMake sure the main power switch of the machine is off.
CConnect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.
DConnect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
AEV047S
AQS015S
Connecting to the Interfaces
7
1
ETurn on the main power switch of the machine.
AIndicator (green)
Lights up green when the machine is connected correctly to the network.
BIndicator (yellow)
Lights up yellow when 100 BASE-TX is in operation. Goes off when 10
BASE-T is in operation.
Note
❒For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
AME005S
Connecting the Machine
8
1
Connecting to the USB Interface
Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.
AConnect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.
BConnect the other end to the USB2.0 port on the host computer.
Note
❒This machine does not come with a USB interface cable. Make sure you
purchase the appropriate cable for the machine and your computer.
❒The USB2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP, Win-
dows Server 2003, Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
• For Windows Me:
Make sure to install "USB Printing Support". When used with Windows
Me, only a speed equal to that of USB1.1 is possible.
•For Mac OS:
To use Macintosh, the machine must be equipped with the optional
PostScript 3 unit. When used with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher, a transfer
speed of USB2.0 is supported.
❒For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
AQS014S
Connecting to the Interfaces
9
1
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface
Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface board.
AConnect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 port.
BConnect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host
computer.
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.
Note
❒Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board.
❒Two interface ports are available for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Either is one can be used.
❒For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
AQS016S
Connecting the Machine
10
1
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface
Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board.
AMake sure the main power switch on the machine is off.
BTurn off the main power switch of the host computer.
CConnect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.
Use the conversion connector (1) supplied with the IEEE 1284 interface board.
DConnect the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host
computer.
Check the shape of the connector to the computer. Connect the cable firmly.
ETurn on the main power switch of the machine.
FTurn on the host computer.
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.
Note
❒For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine",
Printer Reference.
Reference
"Turning On the Power", About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine", Printer Reference
AQS017S
Connecting to the Interfaces
11
1
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface
Connect to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
Note
❒Check the settings of the IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.
❒For details about how to set the IPv4 address and subnet mask from the con-
trol panel of the machine, see "Interface Settings".
Reference
p.59 “Network”
Setup Procedure
Set up IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following procedure:
AME006S
Connecting the Machine
12
1
Note
❒Select [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless
LAN client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using
the infrastructure mode.
❒You can specify either "WEP" or "WPA" to the Security Method.
❒Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].
❒For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from the control panel
on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".
❒For details about how to specify wireless LAN settings from other than the
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Network Settings".
❒For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".
Reference
p.66 “IEEE 802.11b”
p.36 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”
Checking the Connection
Check the wireless LAN connection.
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.
❖When using in infrastructure mode
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infra-
structure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.
ZGDH600J
1
2
Connecting to the Interfaces
13
1
❖When using in adhoc mode / 802.11 ad hoc mode
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is functioning, the LED lights up in orange.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad hoc
mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.
Print the configuration page to verify settings.
Note
❒For more information about printing a configuration page, see "Print List".
Reference
p.186 “Printing the configuration page”
Checking the Signal
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave sta-
tus using the control panel.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Interface Settings].
CPress [IEEE 802.11b].
DPress [Wireless LAN Signal].
The machine's radio wave status appears.
EAfter checking radio wave status, press [Exit].
FPress the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the User Tools / Counter / Inquiry
menu.
Note
❒To check the radio wave status, press [IEEE 802.11b] under [LAN Type] in Net-
work menu of Interface Settings.
Reference
p.36 “Using Utilities to Make Network Settings”
p.66 “IEEE 802.11b”
ZGDH600J
1
2
Connecting the Machine
14
1
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (Sys-
tem Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the in-
terface to be connected.
Important
❒These settings should be made by the system administrator, or with the ad-
vice of the system administrator.
Settings Required to Use the Printer/LAN-Fax
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address As required
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu-
ration
As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol As required
Interface Settings/Network NW Frame Type As required
Interface Settings/Network SMB Computer Name As required
Interface Settings/Network SMB Work Group As required
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Network Settings
15
1
Note
❒IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet
and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface
has priority.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with an IEEE 1394 connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] appears when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Interface Settings/Network Machine Name As required
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Connecting the Machine
16
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using the printer or LAN-Fax function
with an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv6 Address As required
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfigu-
ration
As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network NCP Delivery Protocol As required
Interface Settings/Network NW Frame Type As required
Interface Settings/Network SMB Computer Name As required
Interface Settings/Network SMB Work Group As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/Network Machine Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
Network Settings
17
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an Ethernet
connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port Necessary
Connecting the Machine
18
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-
terface takes precedence.
❒SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to send In-
ternet Fax.
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administra-
tor's E-mail Address.
❒E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-
der to use the reception function.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE 1394
connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
File Transfer E-mail Reception Interval As required
File Transfer Max. Reception E-mail Size As required
File Transfer E-mail Storage in Server As required
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Fax E-mail Account Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Network Settings
19
1
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], also make setting for Administra-
tor's E-mail Address.
❒E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-
der to use the reception function.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port Necessary
File Transfer E-mail Reception Interval As required
File Transfer Max. Reception E-mail Size As required
File Transfer E-mail Storage in Server As required
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Fax E-mail Account Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Connecting the Machine
20
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using Internet Fax with an IEEE
802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port Necessary
File Transfer E-mail Reception Interval As required
File Transfer Max. Reception E-mail Size As required
File Transfer E-mail Storage in Server As required
Network Settings
21
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒SMTP Server and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in order to use the
send function.
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Recep-
tion Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When SMTP Authentication is set to [On], you must also make settings for
Administrator's E-mail Address.
❒E-mail Communication Port and Fax E-mail Account must be specified in or-
der to use the reception function.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an Ethernet con-
nection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Fax E-mail Account Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Connecting the Machine
22
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-
terface takes precedence.
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port As required
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Network Settings
23
1
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 1394 con-
nection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], also make setting for Reception Proto-
col and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to [On], check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port As required
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Connecting the Machine
24
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for sending e-mail with an IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
File Transfer SMTP Server Necessary
File Transfer SMTP Authentication As required
File Transfer POP before SMTP As required
File Transfer Reception Protocol As required
File Transfer POP3 / IMAP4 Settings As required
File Transfer Administrator's E-mail Address As required
File Transfer E-mail Communication Port As required
File Transfer Program / Change /
Delete E-mail Message
As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Network Settings
25
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-
terface takes precedence.
❒When POP before SMTP is set to [On], you must also make settings for Recep-
tion Protocol and POP3 / IMAP4 Settings.
❒When setting POP before SMTP to On, check POP3 port number in E-mail
Communication Port.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function
This section lists the settings required for sending files.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Connecting the Machine
26
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed. If
both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the selected in-
terface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 1394 connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Network Settings
27
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for sending files with an IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are con-
nected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Connecting the Machine
28
1
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an
Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-
lected interface takes precedence.
❒If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
File Transfer Delivery Option As required
File Transfer Fax RX File Transmission As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Network Settings
29
1
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an
IEEE 1394 connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
File Transfer Delivery Option As required
File Transfer Fax RX File Transmission As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Connecting the Machine
30
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for delivering data to network with an
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
❒If Delivery Option is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is specified.
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
File Transfer Delivery Option As required
File Transfer Fax RX File Transmission As required
File Transfer Scanner Resend Interval Time As required
File Transfer Number of Scanner Resends As required
Network Settings
31
1
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
p.69 “File Transfer”
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner
This section lists the settings required for using TWAIN Scanner under the net-
work environment.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-
lected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Connecting the Machine
32
1
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
an IEEE 1394 connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File
Transfer".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using network TWAIN Scanner with
an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Network Settings
33
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Settings Required to Use Document Server
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function under
the network environment.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with
an Ethernet connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Connecting the Machine
34
1
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[LAN Type] is displayed when the wireless LAN interface board is installed.
When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the se-
lected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with
an IEEE 1394 connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Note
❒[IEEE 1394] is displayed when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Interface Settings/Network Ethernet Speed As required
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394 Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Network Settings
35
1
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
This section lists the settings required for using Document Server function with
an IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) connection.
For details about how to specify the settings, see "Interface Settings".
Note
❒For the Effective Protocol setting, check that the protocol you want to use is
set to [Active].
❒[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when the wireless LAN interface
board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.59 “Interface Settings”
Menu User Tool Setting Requirements
Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address Necessary
Interface Settings/Network IPv4 Gateway Address As required
Interface Settings/Network DNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network DDNS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Domain Name As required
Interface Settings/Network WINS Configuration As required
Interface Settings/Network Effective Protocol Necessary
Interface Settings/Network LAN Type As required/Necessary
Interface Settings/Network Permit SNMPv3 Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Permit SSL/TLS Communication As required
Interface Settings/Network Host Name As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode Necessary
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method As required
Interface Settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed As required
Connecting the Machine
36
1
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
You can also specify network settings using utilities such as Web Image Monitor,
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
Note
❒For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Network Guide.
❒For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.
❒For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance", Network Guide.
Reference
"Using Web Image Monitor", Network Guide
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide
"Remote Maintenance by telnet", Network Guide
Interface Settings
Change settings by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin,
and telnet.
❖[Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [IPv4 Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Machine IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Sub-net Mask]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [IPv4 Gateway Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
Network Settings
37
1
❖[Network] → [Machine IPv6 Address] → [Manual Configuration Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [DNS Configuration] → [Specify] → [DNS Server 1-3]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [DDNS Configuration]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Domain Name] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Domain Name] → [Specify] → [Domain Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Primary WINS Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
Connecting the Machine
38
1
❖[Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Secondary WINS Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Scope ID]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv4]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the TCP/IP settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
IPX/SPX.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [IPv6]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [NetWare]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: You can specify the IPX/SPX settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
TCP/IP.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [SMB]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Effective Protocol] → [AppleTalk]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [NCP Delivery Protocol]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Network Settings
39
1
❖[Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Auto Select]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet II]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.2]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet 802.3]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [NW Frame Type] → [Ethernet SNAP]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [SMB Computer Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [SMB Work Group]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Ethernet Speed]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Connecting the Machine
40
1
❖[Network] → [LAN Type] → [Ethernet]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [LAN Type] → [IEEE 802.11b]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Host Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[Network] → [Machine Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Machine IPv4 Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 Address] → [Specify] → [Sub-net Mask]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [DDNS Configuration]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
Network Settings
41
1
❖[IEEE 1394] → [IPv4 over 1394]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Primary WINS Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Secondary WINS Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [WINS Configuration] → [On] → [Scope ID]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [Host Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 1394] → [Domain Name]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 802.11b] → [Communication Mode]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 802.11b] → [SSID Setting]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
Connecting the Machine
42
1
❖[IEEE 802.11b] → [Channel]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 802.11b] → [Security Method]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[IEEE 802.11b] → [Transmission Speed]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Can be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [SMTP Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [SMTP Authentication]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [POP before SMTP]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [Reception Protocol]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Network Settings
43
1
❖[File Transfer] → [Administrator's E-mail Address]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [E-mail Communication Port]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [E-mail Reception Interval]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [Max. Reception E-mail Size]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [E-mail Storage in Server]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [Default User Name / Password (Send)]
• Web Image Monitor: Can be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [Fax E-mail Account]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
❖[File Transfer] → [Scanner Resend Interval Time]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Connecting the Machine
44
1
❖[File Transfer] → [Number of Scanner Resends]
• Web Image Monitor: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
• telnet: Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone
45
1
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone
Line and Telephone
This section describes how to connect the machine to the telephone lines and se-
lect the line type.
Connecting the Telephone Line
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connector.
Important
❒Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.
1. External telephone connector
2. G3 interface unit connector
3. Extra G3 interface unit connector
Selecting the Line Type
Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone
and pulse dial.
Select the line type using Administrator Tools.
Note
❒This function is not available in some regions.
Reference
p.135 “Select Dial / Push Phone”
AQT003S
Connecting the Machine
46
1
47
2. System Settings
This chapter describes user tools in the System Settings menu. For details on
how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Program / Change / Delete User Text
You can register text phrases you often use when specifying settings, such as
".com" and "Regards".
You can register up to 40 entries.
• Program / Change
APress [System Settings].
BCheck that [General Features] is selected.
CPress [Program / Change / Delete User Text].
DPress [Program / Change]
ESelect the user text you want to change.
To program new user text, press [Not Programmed].
FPress [OK].
GPress [Exit].
• Delete
APress [System Settings].
BCheck that [General Features] is selected.
CPress [Program / Change / Delete User Text].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the user text you want to delete.
FPress [Clear].
GPress [Exit].
❖Panel key Sound
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
•On
•Off
System Settings
48
2
❖Warm-Up Beeper (copier/Document Server)
You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy af-
ter leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.
•On
•Off
❖Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)
The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).
•Up
• Down
❖Function Priority
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is
turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.
•Copier
•Document Server
•Fax
•Printer
•Scanner
❖Print Priority
Print Priority is given to the mode selected.
•Display Mode
• Copier/Document Server
• Facsimile
•Printer
•Interleave
•Job Order
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a
maximum of five sheets.
❖Function Reset Timer
You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function.
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from
other functions.
•Set Time
• Immediate
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (3–30 seconds, in 1 second incre-
ments) using the number keys.
The default setting is 3 second(s).
General Features
49
2
❖Output: Copier (copier)
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
1. Finisher Upper Tray
2. Finisher Shift Tray
3. Finisher Upper Tray
4. Finisher Shift Tray
5. Finisher Upper Tray
6. Finisher Shift Tray
7. Finisher Booklet Tray
8. Internal Tray 1
9. Internal Tray 2
❖Output: Document Server (Document Server)
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
•Internal Tray 1
• Internal Tray 2
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
❖Output: Facsimile (facsimile)
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
•Internal Tray 1
• Internal Tray 2
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
AQT004S
System Settings
50
2
❖Output: Printer (printer)
Specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
The output trays set on the printer driver have priority over the output tray
specified below.
•Internal Tray 1
• Internal Tray 2
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
❖System Status/Job List Display Time
Specify how long to display the System Status and Job List display for.
•On: 60 second(s)
•Off
By selecting [On], you can specify a display time between 10 and 999 seconds.
❖Key Repeat
You can enable or disable repetition of an operation if a key on the screen or
control panel is pressed continuously.
•Off
•Normal
• Repeat Time: Medium
• Repeat Time: Long
Note
❒If the Panel Tone setting is [Off], the beeper does not sound, whatever the Warm
Up Notice setting.
❒The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if Interleave is set for Print Priority.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Function Compatibility", Copy/Document Server Reference
Output tray settings
Important
❒You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even if a stapling job is specified
by a different function.
❒When the 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is in-
stalled and Staple or Shift Sort is specified for a job, the job will be delivered
to the finisher shift tray regardless of the output tray specified.
Tray Paper Settings
51
2
Tray Paper Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Tray Paper Settings menu under Sys-
tem Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Important
❒If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in
the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not
detected.
❖Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier/Document Server)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
•Tray 3 (optional)
•Tray 4 (optional)
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.
❖Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile (facsimile)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
•Tray 3 (optional)
•Tray 4 (optional)
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.
❖Paper Tray Priority: Printer (printer)
Specify the tray to supply paper for output.
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
•Tray 3 (optional)
•Tray 4 (optional)
When optional paper tray unit is installed, [Tray 3] and [Tray 4]is displayed.
When optional LCT is installed, [Tray 3] is displayed.
System Settings
52
2
❖Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4
Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray.
The paper guide for the optional LCT is fixed for A4K, 81/2"×11"K size pa-
per. Contact your service representative if you need to change the paper size.
❖The paper sizes you can set for tray 2 are as follows:
•Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
•Inch version
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",
"81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",
"16KL"
❖The paper sizes you can set for tray 3 are as follows:
When optional paper tray unit is installed:
•Metric version
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
•Inch version
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",
"81/2×13L", 81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",
"16KL"
When optional LCT is installed:
"A4K", "81/2×11K"
❖The paper sizes you can set for tray 4 are as follows:
•Metric version
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK",
"B5JISL", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "8×10L",
"71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
•Inch version
"Auto Detect", "11×17L", "11×15L", "10×14L", "81/2×14L",
"81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×14L", "81/4×13L",
"8×13L", "8×10L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "A3L", "A4K",
"A4L", "A5K", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL", "8KL", "16KK",
"16KL"
Tray Paper Settings
53
2
❖Printer Bypass Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper in the bypass tray when printing data from the computer.
❖The paper sizes you can set for bypass tray are as follows:
•Metric version
"Auto Detect", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL",
"B5JISK", "B5JISL", "B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK",
"12×18L", "11×17L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L", "81/2×11K", "81/2×11L",
"81/4×13L", "8×13L", "71/4×101/2K", "71/4×101/2L", "51/2×81/2L",
"41/8×91/2K", "37/8×71/2K", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Specify a custom size of between 90.0-305.0mm vertically, and between
148.0-600.0mm horizontally.
•Inch version
"Auto Detect", "12×18L", "11×17L", "81/2×14L", "81/2×13L",
"81/2×11K", "81/2×11L", "81/4×13L", "8×13L", "71/4×101/2K",
"71/4×101/2L", "51/2×81/2L", "41/8×91/2K", "37/8×71/2K", "A3L",
"A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L", "A6L", "B4JISL", "B5JISK", "B5JISL",
"B6JISL", "C5 EnvK", "C6 EnvK", "DL EnvK", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Specify a custom size of between 3.55"-12.00" vertically, and between
5.83"-23.62" horizontally.
❖Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
•Paper Type
•No Display
•Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
•Label Paper
• OHP (Transparency)
• Special Paper 1
• Special Paper 2
• Special Paper 3
•Cardstock
• Preprinted Paper
•Bond Paper
•Paper Thickness
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)
• Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)
• Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)
• Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)
• Thick Paper 3 (220-253g/m2, 58.5-67lb.)
System Settings
54
2
❖Paper Type: Tray 1-4
Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each paper
tray. The print functions use this information to automatically select the pa-
per tray.
•Paper Type
•No Display
•Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Special Paper 1
• Special Paper 2
• Special Paper 3
•Cardstock
• Preprinted Paper
•Bond Paper
•Paper Thickness
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper (60-81g/m2, 16-22lb.)
• Middle Thick (82-105g/m2, 22-28lb.)
• Thick Paper 1 (106-169g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.)
• Thick Paper 2 (170-219g/m2, 45-58lb.)
• Copying Method in Duplex
•2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy
• Apply Auto Paper Select
•Yes
•No
Tray Paper Settings
55
2
❖Cover Sheet Tray
Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is setting cover sheets.
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and
copy method for two-sided copying.
•Tray to Program
•Off
• Bypass Tray
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
• Tray 3 (optional)
• Tray 4 (optional)
• Copying Method in Duplex
• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy
•Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
❖Slip Sheet Tray
Allows you to specify and display the paper tray that is inserting slip sheets.
After selecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and
copy method for two-sided copying.
•Tray to Program
•Off
• Bypass Tray
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
• Tray 3 (optional)
• Tray 4 (optional)
• Copying Method in Duplex
• 2 Sided Copy
• 1 Sided Copy
•Display Time
• At Mode Selected
• Full Time
System Settings
56
2
Note
❒When paper of the same type and size is loaded in two different paper trays
and you want to specify tray for 2 Sided Copy and tray for 1 Sided Copy,
specify the upper tray for 2 Sided Copy. If one of the trays is specified as the
default in Paper Tray Priority, assign 2 Sided Copy to that tray.
❒A mark appears next to the paper tray if [Off] is selected in [Auto Paper Se-
lect].
❒[Auto Paper Select] can only be selected for the copier function if [No Display]
and [Recycled Paper] are selected. If [No] is selected, Auto Paper Select is not
valid for the tray.
❒Functions using the cover sheet tray setting are the front cover function and
front/back cover function.
❒If you set "Display Time" to "At Mode Selected" in "Cover Sheet Tray" and
"Slip Sheet Tray", the trays selected for the cover sheets and slip sheets are in-
dicated only if you have enabled the use of cover sheets and slip sheets.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Covers", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Slip Sheets", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Timer Settings
57
2
Timer Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Timer Settings menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Auto Off Timer
After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine auto-
matically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called "Auto Off".
The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as "Off mode", or
"Sleep mode". For the Auto Off Timer, specify the time to elapse before Auto Off.
The default setting is 60 min..
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Auto Off may not work when error messages appear.
❖Energy Saver Timer
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to lower-power
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
The default setting is 15 min..
❖Panel Off Timer
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 3 seconds for
Panel off Level 1 and 15 seconds for Panel off Level 2.
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes, using the number
keys.
The default setting is 60 second(s).
❖System Auto Reset Timer
The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the func-
tion set in Function Priority when no operations are in progress, or when an
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.
•On
•Off
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys
The default setting is 60 second(s).
❖Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (copier/Document Server)
Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server modes reset.
•On
•Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting is 60 second(s).
System Settings
58
2
❖Facsimile Auto Reset Timer (facsimile)
Specifies the time to elapse before the facsimile mode resets.
The time can be set from 30 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting is 30 second(s).
❖Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)
Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.
•On
•Off
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting is 60 second(s).
❖Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)
Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.
•On
•Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
The default setting is 60 second(s).
❖Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
To change between year, month, and day, press [ ← ] and [ → ].
❖Set Time
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Enter the time using the 24–hour format (in 1 second increments).
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press [ ← ] and [ → ].
❖Auto Logout Timer
Specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user does not
operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.
•On
•Off
The time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one second increments, using
the number keys.
The default setting is 180 second(s).
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Interface Settings
59
2
Interface Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Interface Settings menu under System
Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Network
This section describes the user tools in the Network menu under Interface Set-
tings.
❖Machine IPv4 Address
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
If the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed, and you are using the IEEE 1394
interface, you must specify a domain address that is different from the [IPv4
Address] of [IEEE 1394]. If you to set the address for the same domain, set a dif-
ferent value for the subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that
of other machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the
same time, settings must be made carefully.
•Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
•Specify
• Machine IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
❖IPv4 Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.
Specify the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
• IPv4 Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
❖Machine IPv6 Address
Specify the machine’s IPv6 network address.
• Link-local Address
The machine’s specified link-local address appears.
• Manual Configuration Address
The machine’s manually configured address appears.
• Stateless Address: 1-5
The specified stateless address appears.
System Settings
60
2
❖IPv6 Gateway Address
Displays the machine’s IPv6 gateway address.
❖IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
Specify IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration.
•Active
•Inactive
❖DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
When you select [Specify], enter the DNS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x"
indicates a number).
•Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
•Specify
• DNS Server 1: 000.000.000.000
• DNS Server 2: 000.000.000.000
• DNS Server 3: 000.000.000.000
❖DDNS Configuration
Specify the DDNS settings.
•Active
•Inactive
❖Domain Name
Specify the domain name.
The default domain name is blank.
•Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
•Specify
❖WINS Configuration
Specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, enter the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"("x" in-
dicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.
Enter a scope ID using up to 31 characters.
•On
• Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
•Scope ID
•Off
Interface Settings
61
2
❖Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
•IPv4: Active / Inactive
• IPv6: Active / Inactive
•NetWare: Active / Inactive
• SMB: Active / Inactive
• AppleTalk: Active / Inactive
❖NCP Delivery Protocol
Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
•IPX Priority
•TCP / IP Priority
•IPX Only
• TCP / IP Only
If you select "IPX Only" or "TCP / IP Only", you cannot switch the protocol
even if you cannot connect with it. If "NetWare" in [Effective Protocol] is set to
"Inactive", you can only use TCP/IP.
❖NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
•Auto Select
•Ethernet II
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
❖SMB Computer Name
Specify the SMB computer name.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Do not set a computer name starting with RNP and rnp.
Use uppercase letters for alphabets.
❖SMB Work Group
Specify the SMB work group.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
System Settings
62
2
❖Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should
usually be selected.
•Auto Select
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
❖LAN Type
When you have installed the IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select the method of
connection.
•Ethernet
• IEEE 802.11b
[LAN Type] is displayed when wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet and
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface has
priority.
❖Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping command using given IPv4 address.
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the
ping command.
• Make sure that "IPv4" in [Effective Protocol] is set to "Effective".
• Check that the machine with assigned IPv4 address is connected to the net-
work.
• There is a possibility that the same IPv4 address is used for the specified
equipment.
❖Permit SNMPv3 Communication
Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.
• Encryption Only
•Encryption / Clear Text
If you select to [Encryption Only], you need to set an encryption password for
the machine.
❖Permit SSL/TLS Communication
Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
• Ciphertext Only
• Ciphertext Priority
•Ciphertext / Clear Text
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the SSL certificate for the ma-
chine.
Interface Settings
63
2
❖Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.
❖Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
Enter the machine name using up to 31 characters.
Parallel Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Parallel Interface menu under Inter-
face Settings.
[Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1284
interface board.
❖Parallel Timing
Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.
•ACK Outside
•ACK Inside
•STB Down
❖Parallel Communication Speed
Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.
•High Speed
•Standard
❖Selection Signal Status
Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.
•High
•Low
❖Input Prime
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon reception.
•Active
•Inactive
❖Bidirectional Communication
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a
parallel interface.
•On
•Off
When set to [Off], the bidirectional communication function will be disabled,
and the printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect func-
tion.
System Settings
64
2
❖Signal Control
Specifies how error during printing or sending facsimile from the computer
is to be dealt with.
•Job Acceptance Priority
•Printer Priority
IEEE 1394
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 1394 menu under Interface Set-
tings.
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1394 inter-
face board.
❖IPv4 Address
Before using this machine in the network environment, you must specify the
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the IPv4 address and subnet mask as
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the Eth-
ernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same do-
main, set different values for the subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], make sure that IPv4 address is different from that
of other machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you are using Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394) interfaces at the
same time, settings must be made carefully.
•Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
•Specify
• Machine IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
❖DDNS Configuration
Specify the DDNS settings.
•Active
•Inactive
❖Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 characters.
❖Domain Name
Make settings for the domain name.
The default domain name is blank.
•Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
•Specify
Enter the domain name using up to 63 characters.
Interface Settings
65
2
❖WINS Configuration
Specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, specify the WINS Server IPv4 address as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
("xxx" indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the scope ID.
Enter scope ID using up to 31 characters.
•On
• Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
• Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
•Scope ID
•Off
❖IPv4 over 1394
When you use the IPv4 over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to con-
nect the machine to the network, or printing from computer with the IPv4
over 1394 driver, you must specify [Active] for [IPv4 over 1394].
•Active
•Inactive
Printing with IPv4 over 1394 is possible under Windows Me/XP and Win-
dows Server 2003.
❖SCSI print (SBP-2)
When you print using the SCSI print client function supported by Windows
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, you must set [SCSI print (SBP-2)].
•Active
•Inactive
❖Bidirectional SCSI print
Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for status requests when using the
IEEE 1394 interface.
•On
•Off
If this is set to [Off] bidirectional communication will not work.
System Settings
66
2
IEEE 802.11b
This section describes the user tools in the IEEE 802.11b menu under Interface
Settings.
[IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN
interface board.
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
❖Communication Mode
Specifies the communication mode of the wireless LAN.
•802.11 Ad-hoc Mode
• Ad-hoc Mode
• Infrastructure Mode
❖SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11
ad hoc mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
If blank is specified in 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode, "ASSID" appears.
❖Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode.
The default setting is 11.
The following channels are available:
•Metric version: 1-14
• Inch version: 1-11
❖Security Method
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
If you select [WEP], always enter WEP key. If you select [WPA], the encryption
and authentication methods.
Specify "WPA", when [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode].
•Off
•WEP
•WPA
• WPA Encryption Method
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP(AES)".
• WPA Authent. Method
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA802.1X)". If you have selected "WPA-
PSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8- 63 characters in ASCII code.
❖Wireless LAN Signal
When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave
status using the control panel.
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].
Interface Settings
67
2
❖Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
•Auto Select
• 11Mbps Fixed
• 5.5Mbps Fixed
•2Mbps Fixed
•1Mbps Fixed
❖Restore Factory Defaults
You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
•No
•Yes
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Print List
You can check items related to the network environment.
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network infor-
mation.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Interface Settings].
System Settings
68
2
CPress [Print List].
DPress the {Start} key.
The configuration page is printed.
EPress [Exit].
FPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can also exit by pressing [Exit] on the User Tools main menu.
File Transfer
69
2
File Transfer
This section describes the user tools in the File Transfer menu under System Set-
tings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Delivery Option
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents to the ScanRouter
delivery server.
•On
• Main Delivery Server IPv4 Address
• Sub Delivery Server IPv4 Address
•Off
Specify this option when selecting whether or not to use the ScanRouter delivery
software. If you do, you will have to preregister I/O devices in the ScanRouter
delivery software.
❖Capture Server IP Address
Specify the capture server IPv4 address.
This setting appears when the media link board is installed, and that the cap-
ture function is being used by the ScanRouter delivery software.
System Settings
70
2
❖Fax RX File Transmission
Specify how to deliver fax files received via the different lines.
• Setting per Line
•Line 1
•Line 2
•Line 3
•E-mail
• IP-Fax
The lines appear according to the operating environment.
• RX File Delivery
Specifies whether or not received fax documents are sent to the ScanRouter
delivery software for each fax line.
• Deliver to Server
•Do not Deliver
•Print at Delivery
Specify whether or not received fax documents sent to the ScanRouter de-
livery software should also be printed at the same time.
•Print
•Do not Print
• File to Deliver
Specify whether all received fax documents or only received fax docu-
ments that include delivery codes (ID or SUB/SEP codes) are sent to the
ScanRouter delivery software.
• File with Delivery Code
•Print File
• Delivery Failure File
If a received fax document cannot be sent to the ScanRouter delivery soft-
ware, it is stored in memory. To print a stored file, select [Print File], to de-
lete, select [Delete File].
If the machine can send the data to the ScanRouter delivery software, it
does so automatically. If you delete the data, you will not be able to distrib-
ute or print it.
•Print File
• Delete File
❖SMTP Server
When using DNS, enter the host name.
When not using DNS, enter the SMTP server IPv4 address.
•Server Name
• Port No.: 25
Enter the server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
Enter port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
File Transfer
71
2
❖SMTP Authentication
Specify SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DIGEST-MD5).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level using authentication that requires entering the user name and
password.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],
and then specify the user name, password and encryption.
Enter the user name and password to be set for the Administrator's e-mail ad-
dress when using Internet Fax.
• SMTP AUTH
•On
User Name
Enter the user name using up to 191 characters. Spaces cannot be en-
tered. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified.
Add "@" after the user name, as in "user name@realm".
E-mail Address
Password
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
Encryption: Auto / On / Off
[Encryption]-[Auto]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[On]: Use If the authentication method is CRAMMD5 or DI-
GEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Off]: Use If the authentication method is PLAIN, or LOGIN.
•Off
❖POP before SMTP
Specify POP authentication (POP before SMTP).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the
time specified for [Wait Time after Authent.] has elapsed.
If you select [On], enter [Server Name] in [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings]. Also, check the
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].
•On
• Wait Time after Authent.: 300
Specify [Wait Time after Authent.] from zero to 10,000 milliseconds, in in-
crements of one millisecond.
•User Name
Enter the user name using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
• E-mail Address
• Password
Enter the password using up to 63 characters. Spaces cannot be entered.
•Off
System Settings
72
2
❖Reception Protocol
Specify Reception Protocol for receiving Internet Fax.
•POP3
•IMAP4
•SMTP
❖POP3 / IMAP4 Settings
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for receiving Internet faxes.
The specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].
•Server Name
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.
If DNS is not in use, enter the POP3/IMAP4 or server IPv4 address.
Enter POP3/IMAP4 server name using up to 127 characters. Spaces cannot
be entered.
•Encryption
•Auto
Password encryption is automatically set according to the POP/IMAP
server settings.
•On
Encrypt password.
•Off
Do not encrypt password.
❖Administrator's E-mail Address
On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified this appears as
the sender's address.
When sending e-mail under the Internet fax function, administrator's e-mail
address will appear as the sender’s address under the following conditions:
• The sender has not been specified and the machine’s e-mail address has
not been registered.
• The specified sender is not registered in the machine’s address book and
the machine’s e-mail address has not been registered.
When conducting SMTP authentication for the transmitted files under the In-
ternet fax function, the Administrator's E-mail Address will appear in the
"From:" box. If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP
Authentication], make sure to specify this setting.
Enter up to 128 characters.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify
the sender.
File Transfer
73
2
❖E-mail Communication Port
Specify the port numbers for receiving Internet faxes. The specified POP3
port number is used for [POP before SMTP].
•POP3: 110
•IMAP4: 143
•SMTP: 25
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
❖E-mail Reception Interval
Specify, in minutes, the time interval for receiving Internet faxes via POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
•On: 15 minute(s)
•Off
If [On] is selected, the time interval can be set from 2 to 1440 minutes in incre-
ments of one minute.
❖Max. Reception E-mail Size
Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for receiving Internet faxes.
•2MB
Enter a size from one to 50 MB in increments of one megabyte.
❖E-mail Storage in Server
Specify whether or not to store received Internet fax e-mails on the POP3 or
IMAP4 server.
•Off
•All
•Errors Only
❖Default User Name / Password (Send)
Specify the user name and password required when sending scan files direct-
ly to a shared folder on a computer running Windows, to an FTP server, or to
a NetWare server.
• SMB User Name
• SMB Password
•FTP User Name
• FTP Password
•NCP User Name
• NCP Password
Enter in up to 64 characters.
System Settings
74
2
❖Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message
You can program, change, or delete the e-mail message used when sending
an Internet fax or scan file as an attachment.
• Program / Change
APress [System Settings].
BPress [File Transfer].
CPress [TNext].
DPress [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].
EPress [Program / Change].
FPress [Not Programmed].
GPress [Change].
HEnter a name, and then press [OK].
Enter the name using up to 20 characters.
IPress [Edit].
To start a new line, press [OK] to return to the e-mail message screen,
and then press [TNext] in "Select Line to Edit:".
JEnter the text, and then press [OK].
Enter up to five lines of text. Each line can consist of up to 80 characters.
KPress [OK].
LPress [Exit].
• Delete
APress [System Settings].
BPress [File Transfer].
CPress [TNext].
DPress [Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message].
EPress [Delete].
FSelect the e-mail message to delete.
The confirmation message about deleting appears.
GPress [Yes].
File Transfer
75
2
❖Auto Specify Sender Name
Set whether or not to specify the name of the sender when sending e-mail.
•On
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"
box. If you do not specify the sender’s address, the administrator’s e-mail
address will appear in the "From:" box.
If you do not specify the sender when sending a file by e-mail under the
fax function, or if the specified e-mail address is not registered in the ma-
chine’s address book, the machine’s e-mail address will appear in the
"From:" box. If the machine does not have an e-mail address, the adminis-
trator’s e-mail address will appear in the "From:" box.
•Off
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address will appear in the "From:"
box, but you cannot send e-mail without specifying the sender’s e-mail ad-
dress. Under the fax function, you cannot send e-mail if the specified send-
er’s e-mail address is not registered in the machine’s address book.
❖Fax E-mail Account
Specify e-mail address, user name and password for receiving Internet faxes.
•Receive
• E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address using up to 128 characters.
•User Name
Enter a user name using up to 64 characters.
• Password
Enter a password using up to 64 characters.
•Do not Receive
❖Scanner Resend Interval Time
Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending a scan file, if it can-
not be sent to the delivery server or mail server.
The default setting is 300 second(s).
The interval time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds in one second increments,
using the number keys.
This setting is for the scanner function.
❖Number of Scanner Resends
Sets a maximum number of times a scan file is resent to the delivery server or
mail server.
•On: 3 time(s)
•Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 1 to 99. This setting is
for the scanner function.
This setting is for the scanner function.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
System Settings
76
2
Administrator Tools
This section describes the user tools in the Administrator Tools menu under Sys-
tem Settings.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,
contact the administrator.
We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Ad-
ministrator Tools settings.
❖Address Book Management
You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.
For details, see "Address Book".
• Program / Change
You can register and change names as well as user codes.
•Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-
lection.
•Auth. Info
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP
server.
•Protection
You can register a protection code.
•Fax Dest.
You can register a fax number, international TX mode, fax header, label
insertion, IP-Fax destination, and protocol.
•E-mail
You can register an e-mail address.
•Folder
You can register the protocol, path, port number, and server name.
• Add to Group
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a name from the Address Book.
You can register up to 2,000 names.
You can register up to 500 user codes.
You can also register and manage names in the Address Book using Web Im-
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Administrator Tools
77
2
❖Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group
Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.
• Program / Change
You can register and change groups.
•Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title se-
lection.
• Programmed User/Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
•Protection
You can register a protection code.
• Add to Group
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.
• Delete
You can delete a group from the Address Book.
You can register up to 100 groups.
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web Im-
age Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
❖Address Book: Change Order
Changes the order of registered names.
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot move
items to another page.
For example, you cannot move an item from "PLANNING" ([OPQ]) to "DAI-
LY" ([CD]).
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Change Order].
System Settings
78
2
DPress the name key to be moved.
You can select a name using the number keys.
EPress the name key in the place you want to move it to.
The user key is moved to the selected position, and the user key currently
at the selected position is moved forward or backward.
If you move the selected user key forward, the user key currently at the se-
lected position is moved backward.
If you move the selected user key backward, the user key currently at the
selected position is moved forward.
You can also select a name using the number keys.
Administrator Tools
79
2
❖Print Address Book: Destination List
You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.
•Print in Title 1 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order.
•Print in Title 2 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 2 order.
•Print in Title 3 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 3 order.
•Print Group Dial List
Prints the group Address Book.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Print Address Book: Destination List].
DSelect the print format.
ETo print the list on two-sided pages, select [Print on 2 Sides].
FPress the {Start} key.
The list prints out.
❖Address Book: Edit Title
You can edit the title to easily find a user.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Edit Title].
DPress the title key you want to change.
System Settings
80
2
EEnter the new name, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
❖Address Book: Switch Title
Specifies the title to select a name.
•Title 1
• Title 2
• Title 3
❖Back Up / Restore Address Book
You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage or restore the
backup copy from the external storage.
•Back Up
You can back up the machine’s address book to external storage.
•Restore
You can restore the backup copy of the address book from external storage.
•Format
You can format the external storage.
• Obtain Media Info
The free space and occupied space of the external storage are displayed.
❖Display / Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
• Display / Print Counter
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, Copier, Printer, A3 /
DLT, Duplex, Fax Prints, Send / TX Total, Fax Transmission, Scanner Send).
•Print Counter List
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
❖Display / Clear / Print Counter per User
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
Press [UPrevious] and [TNext] to show all the numbers of prints.
The number of prints may differ from the counter values shown in Display /
Print Counter.
• Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter value for all the users.
• Clear Counter List for All Users
Resets the counter value for all the users.
• Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter value for each user.
•Clear Counter List per User
Resets the counter value for each user.
• Select All on the Page
Select the all users on the page.
Administrator Tools
81
2
❖User Authentication Management
•User Code Auth.
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions and
supervise their use.
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints cor-
responding to the codes entered using the printer driver.
If User Code Authentication has been specified, Auto Color Select cannot be
used.
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your ad-
ministrator.
• Copier: Restrict All, Single Color / Full Color, Full Color, Do not Restrict
• Printer: Black & White, PC Control, Do not Restrict
• Other Functions: Document Server, Facsimile, Scanner
• Printer Job Authentication: Entire, Simple (Limitation), Simple (All)
•Basic Auth.
•Windows Auth.
•LDAP Auth.
• Integration Svr. Auth.
•Off
❖Enhanced Authentication Management
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Administrator Authentication Management
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Program / Change Administrator
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Key Counter Management
Specify the functions you want to manage with the key counter.
• Copier: Full Color / Single Color
• Printer: Single Color
• Other Functions: Document Server / Facsimile / Scanner
❖Extended Security
Specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For details
about the extended security functions, consult your administrator.
System Settings
82
2
❖Auto Delete File in Document Server
Specify whether documents stored in the Document Server will or will not be
deleted after a specified period of time.
•On: 3 day(s)
•Off
If you select [On], documents stored subsequently are deleted after the speci-
fied period.
If you select [Off], documents are not automatically deleted.
If you select [On], enter a number of days from 1 to 180 (in 1 day increments).
The default is 3 days, this means documents are deleted 3 days (72 hours) af-
ter they are stored.
❖Delete All Files in Document Server
You can delete files stored in the Document Server, including files stored for Sam-
ple Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print under the printer function.
•No
•Yes
Even if a password is always set, all documents are deleted.
A confirmation message appears. To delete all documents, select [Yes].
❖Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server
Program the LDAP server to find up e-mail destinations in the LDAP server
Address Book directly. This function is possible when sending scan files by e-
mail using the scanner or fax function.
•Name
•Server Name
•Search Base
•Port Number
• Use Secure Connection (SSL)
• Authentication
•User Name
• Password
• Search Conditions
•Search Options
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.
•Server Name
•Search Base
•Port Number
• Search Conditions
• Authentication
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under LDAP server.
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Ver 2.0 does not support
High Security authentication.
Administrator Tools
83
2
❖LDAP Search
Specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.
•On
•Off
If you select [Off], LDAP server list will not appear on the searching dis-
play.
❖AOF (Always On)
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
•On
•Off
❖Firmware Version
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.
❖Network Security Level
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Auto Erase Memory Setting
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Erase All Memory
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Delete All Logs
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Transfer Log Setting
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
❖Data Security for Copying
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.205 “Address Book”
p.219 “Printing the Counter for Each User”
p.279 “Counter”
System Settings
84
2
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To program / change the LDAP server
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
FSet each item as necessary.
GPress [OK] after setting each item.
For details about LDAP server, see "Programming the LDAP server".
HPress [Exit].
IPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.85 “Programming the LDAP server”
To delete the programmed LDAP server
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the LDAP server you want to delete.
FPress [Yes].
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Administrator Tools
85
2
Programming the LDAP server
This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To enter an identification name
APress [Change] under "Name".
Register a name for the LDAP server that will appear on the server selection
screen of the LDAP search operation.
BEnter the server’s identification name.
CPress [OK].
To enter a server name
APress [Change] under "Server Name".
Register the LDAP server’s host name or IPv4 address.
BEnter the LDAP server name.
CPress [OK].
To enter the search base
APress [Change] under "Search Base".
Select a route folder to start the search from e-mail addresses registered in the
selected folder are search targets.
BEnter the search base.
For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, en-
ter "dc=sales department, o=ABC". (In this example, the description is for an
active directory. "dc" is for the organization unit, and "o" is for the company.)
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environ-
ment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check your server environment and enter any required specifications.
CPress [OK].
System Settings
86
2
To enter a port number
APress [Change] under "Port No.".
Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a
port that is compliant with your environment.
BEnter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "636".
To start SSL communication
APress [On] under "Use Secure Connection (SSL).
Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "689".
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your net-
work administrator.
To set authentication
APress [TNext].
BPress [On] or [High Security] under "Authentication".
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account
for authentication.
Authentication settings must comply with your server’s authentication set-
tings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.
[High Security] is available only with LDAP Version 3.0.
When [High Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted be-
fore it is sent to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent with-
out encryption.
Administrator Tools
87
2
To enter the user name and password
APress [TNext].
BPress [Change] under "User Name".
When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator
account name and password when using authentication for each individual
or each search.
CEnter the user name, and then press [OK].
Procedures for the user name setting differ depending on server environ-
ment. Check your server environment before making the setting.
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name,
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name
DPress [Change] under "Password".
EEnter the password, and then press [OK].
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to
access the LDAP server.
You can set the user name and password in this machine’s Address Book to
allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administra-
tor Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.
To test the connection
APress [Connection Test].
Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check
authentication works according to the authentication settings.
A connection test is carried out.
BPress [Exit].
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.
System Settings
88
2
To set search conditions
APress [TNext] twice.
BPress [Change] for items you want to use as search conditions from the fol-
lowing: [Name], [E-mail Address], [Fax Number], [Company Name], and [Depart-
ment Name].
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered at-
tribute, the function searches the LDAP server’s Address Book.
CEnter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.
To set search options
APress [TNext] three times.
BPress [Change] under "Attribute".
CEnter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared key-
words such as Name, E-mail Address, FAX Number, Company Name, and
Department Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your
LDAP server, and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the
search. For example, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter
"employeeNo." in the Attribute field, and "Employee No." in the key display
field.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.
DPress [Change] under "Key Display".
Administrator Tools
89
2
EEnter the key display, and then press [OK].
The registered "key display" appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.
• Without key display registration
• With key display registration
The key does not appear on the search screen unless both "Attribute" and
"Key Display" are registered. Make sure you register both to use the optional
search.
System Settings
90
2
91
3. Copier / Document Server
Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Copier / Document Server Features menu.
For details on how to access Copier / Document Server Features, see "Accessing
User Tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Copier /
Document Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Auto Image Density Priority
You can set whether Auto Image Density is "On" or "Off" when the machine
is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
• Full Color
•On
•Off
• B&W / Single Color
•On
•Off
❖Original Type Priority
You can select the original type effective when the power is turned on, or modes
cleared.
• Full Color
•Text
•Text / Photo
•Photo
•Pale
•Generation Copy
•Map
• B&W / Single Color
•Text
•Text / Photo
•Photo
•Pale
•Generation Copy
•Map
Copier / Document Server Features
92
3
❖Original Photo Type Priority
When you select "Text / Photo" or "Photo" in "Original Type Priority", you
can change the settings of the selected original type.
• Glossy Photo
•Printed Photo
•Copied Photo
❖Original Type Display
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
•Hide
•Display
If you select [Hide], the display is as below.
❖Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown on the ini-
tial display.
•Hide
•Display
If you select [Hide], the display is shown as below. Press [Auto Paper Select] to
display paper sizes.
❖Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
•Top to Top
•Top to Bottom
General Features
93
3
❖Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
•Top to Top
•Top to Bottom
❖Max. Copy Quantity
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
The default setting is 999 sheets.
❖Auto Tray Switching
If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automat-
ically shifts to the other when the first tray runs out of paper (when Auto Pa-
per Select is selected.) This function is called "Auto Tray Switching". This
setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching or not.
•With Image Rotation
Use to copy when using the Auto Tray Switching function.
• Without Image Rotation
Only copies with Auto Tray Switching if you load paper of the same size
and in the same orientation in two or more trays. If the paper is not the
same size or in the same orientation, copying is interrupted and the mes-
sage "Load paper." is displayed.
•Off
When a paper tray runs out of paper, copying is interrupted and the mes-
sage "Load paper." is displayed.
❖Tone: Original Remains
The beeper (key tone) sounds if you forget to remove originals after copying.
•On
•Off
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) is [Off] the beeper does not
sound irrespective of the Tone: Original Remains setting.
❖Job End Call
You can choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copying is complete.
If Panel Tone of User Tools (System Settings) settings is [On], the machine
beeps to notify you that it did not complete a job for reasons such as copying
was interrupted, the paper tray ran out of paper, or a paper jam occurred.
•On
•Off
Copier / Document Server Features
94
3
❖Customize Function: Copier
You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Copy Function keys.
•Off
• 2 originals → 2 Sided: Top to Top
• 2 originals → 2 Sided: Top to Bottom
• 2 Sided → 2 Sided
• 2 Sided → 2 Sheets
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals
• 4 originals → 2 Sided Combine: Top to Top
• 4 originals → 2 Sided Combine: Top to Bottom
• 1 Sided → Magazine
• 2 Sided → Magazine
• Create Margin
• Original Orientation
•Batch
• Staple: Top Slant/Left
• Staple: Bottom Slant/Left
•Staple: Left 2
• Staple: Top 2
•Staple: Top
• Staple: Bottom
• Saddle Stitch
•2 Holes Left
•2 Holes Top
•3 Holes Left
•3 Holes Top
•4 Holes Left
•4 Holes Top
General Features
95
3
•Rotate Sort
• Positive/Negative
❖Customize Function: Document Server Storage
You can assign up to six frequently-used functions to Document Server Stor-
age keys.
•Off
• 2 Sided original: Top to Top
• 2 Sided original: Top to Bottom
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals
• 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 2 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 4 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Top → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals
• 2 Sided: Top to Bottom → 1 Sided Combine: 8 originals
• Create Margin
• Original Orientation
•Batch
• Positive/Negative
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.47 “Panel key Sound”
"Selecting the Original Type Setting", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Adjusting Copy Image Density", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Copier / Document Server Features
96
3
Reproduction Ratio
This section describes the user tools in the Reproduction Ratio menu under
Copier / Document Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Shortcut R/E
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce / Enlarge ratios other
than the fixed Reduce / Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial dis-
play. You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
•Metric version
• 25%
•A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)
•A3 → 8"×13" (65%)
•A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)
•B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)
•8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)
• 93%
•B4JIS → A3 (115%)
•8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)
•A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)
•A5 → A3 (200%)
• 400%
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)
•Off
Default:
•F1: 71%
•F2: 141%
•F3: 93%
•Inch version
• 25%
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)
• 11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)
•8
1/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)
•8
1/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)
• 93%
•8
1/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)
•8
1/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)
Reproduction Ratio
97
3
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)
• 400%
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)
•Off
Default:
•F1: 73%
•F2: 155%
•F3: 93%
❖R / E Ratio
Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Reduce / Enlarge]
is pressed on the copier screen.
•Metric version
• 25%
•A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)
•A3 → 8"×13" (65%)
•A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)
•B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)
•8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)
• 93%
•B4JIS → A3 (115%)
•8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)
•A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)
•A5 → A3 (200%)
• 400%
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)
•Inch version
• 25%
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)
Copier / Document Server Features
98
3
• 11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)
•8
1/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)
•8
1/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)
• 93%
•8
1/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)
•8
1/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)
• 400%
• User R / E Ratio (25-400%)
❖R/E Ratio Priority
You can set the ratio that has priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is pressed.
•Metric version
• 400%
•A5 → A3 (200%)
•A4 → A3, A5 → A4 (141%)
•8"×13" → A3, A4 → B4JIS (122%)
•B4JIS → A3 (115%)
• 93%
•8"×13" → A4, B4JIS → 8"×13" (82%)
•B4JIS → 8"×13" (75%)
•A3 → A4, A4 → A5 (71%)
•A3 → 8"×13" (65%)
•A3 → A5, 8"×13" → A5 (50%)
• 25%
•Inch version
• 400%
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 11"×17" (200%)
•5
1/2"×81/2" → 81/2"×14" (155%)
•8
1/2"×11" → 11"×17" (129%)
•8
1/2"×14" → 11"×17" (121%)
• 93%
•8
1/2"×13" → 81/2"×11" (85%)
•8
1/2"×14" → 81/2"×11" (78%)
•11"×15" → 81/2"×11" (73%)
• 11"×17" → 81/2"×11" (65%)
• 11"×17" → 51/2"×81/2" (50%)
• 25%
Copier / Document Server Features
100
3
Edit
This section describes the user tools in the Edit menu under Copier / Document
Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Enter the width of the binding margin with the number keys as follows:
• Metric version: 0–30 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0"-1.2" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Enter the width of the erased margin with the number keys as follows:
• Metric version: 2–99 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
• Inch version: 0.1"-3.9" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
An image of approximately 1.5 mm (0.06") will not be displayed as the width of
the separation line, when specifying solid or broken lines.
❖Front Margin: Left / Right
Specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjust-
ment mode.
•Left
• Right
Default:
•Metric version: Left 5 mm
• Inch version: Left 0.2"
❖Back Margin: Left / Right
Specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjust-
ment mode.
•Left
• Right
Default:
•Metric version: Right 5 mm
• Inch version: Right 0.2"
❖Front Margin: Top / Bottom
Specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjust-
ment mode.
•Top
•Bttm.
Default:
•Metric version: T / B: 0mm
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"
Edit
101
3
❖Back Margin: Top/Bottom
Specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies in Margin Adjust-
ment mode.
•Top
•Bottom
Default:
•Metric version: T / B: 0mm
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"
❖1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.
The margin is set to the same value of "Back Margin: Left/Right".
•Left
•Right
Default:
•Metric version: Right 5 mm
• Inch version: Right 0.2"
❖1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back side.
The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.
•Top
•Bottom
Default:
•Metric version: T / B: 0mm
• Inch version: T / B: 0.0"
❖Erase Border Width
Top/Bottom 0mm
Default:
•Metric version: 10mm
• Inch version: 0.4"
❖Erase Original Shadow in Combine
In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary
margin around all four edges of each original.
•On
•Off
❖Erase Center Width
Specify the width of the erased center margins with this function.
Default:
•Metric version: 10 mm
• Inch version: 0.4"
Copier / Document Server Features
102
3
❖Front Cover Copy in Combine
You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you select
Front Cover mode.
•Combine
•Do not Combine
❖Copy Order in Combine
You can set the copy order in Combine mode to Left to Right or Top to Bottom.
•From Left to Right
•From Top to Bottom
❖Orientation: Booklet, Magazine
Select the opening orientation of copies made using Booklet or Magazine
mode.
•Open to Left
•Open to Right
❖Copy on Designating Page in Combine
Specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets in
Desig./Chapter mode.
•Combine
•Do not Combine
GCST019E
GCAH090E
Edit
103
3
❖Image Repeat Separation Line
You can select a separation line and color using the Image Repeat function
from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
•None
• Solid
•Broken A
•Broken B
• Crop Marks
Line color (Full Color):
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.
Copier / Document Server Features
104
3
❖Double Copies Separation Line
You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from: None,
Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
•None
• Solid
•Broken A
•Broken B
• Crop Marks
Line color (Full Color):
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.
Edit
105
3
❖Separation Line in Combine
You can select a separation line using the Combine function from: None, Sol-
id, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
•None
• Solid
•Broken A
•Broken B
• Crop Marks
Line color (Full Color):
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Separation lines cannot be specified when using [None].
In "Black and White", printing will be done in black.
Selecting solid or broken lines might produce a blank area of approximately
1.5 mm (0.06") in width along the separation line.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Booklet/Magazine", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Copier / Document Server Features
106
3
Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Stamp menu under Copier / Document
Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
Background Numbering
This section describes the user tools in the Background Numbering menu under
Stamp.
❖Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
•Small
•Normal
•Large
❖Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
•Light
•Normal
•Dark
•Very Dark
❖Stamp Color
You can set the color of the numbers.
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Stamp
107
3
Preset Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Preset Stamp menu under Stamp.
❖Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.
•English
•German
•French
•Italian
•Spanish
•Dutch
•Portuguese
• Polish
•Czech
•Swedish
•Finnish
•Hungarian
• Norwegian
•Danish
• Russian
•Japanese
• Simplified Chinese
•Traditional Chinese
•Hangul
❖Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is pressed.
•COPY
•URGENT
•PRIORITY
•For Your Info.
• PRELIMINARY
•For Internal Use Only
•CONFIDENTIAL
•DRAFT
Copier / Document Server Features
108
3
❖Stamp Format
Specify how each of stamp is printed.
•Stamp Position
Specify where to print the stamp.
•Top Left
•Top Center
•Top Right
•Center Left
•Center
• Center Right
•Bottom Left
•Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
•Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown
below.
•Metric version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center Left"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Center Right"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• Inch version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center Left"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Center Right"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
•Size
You can set the size of the stamp.
•1X
•2X
Stamp
109
3
•Density
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.
•Normal
The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot check which parts will
overlap.
•Lighter
The image can be seen through the stamp.
•Lightest
The image appears even clearer than in the Lighter setting.
• Page to Stamp
You can have the stamp printed on the first page or all pages.
•All Pages
•1st Page Only
❖Stamp Color
Sets the stamp print color.
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Reference
"Preset Stamp", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Copier / Document Server Features
110
3
User Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the User Stamp menu under Stamp.
❖Program/Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete user stamps.
You can register up to four custom stamps with your favorite designs.
❖Stamp Format:1-4
Specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 4 is printed.
•Stamp Position
Specify where to print the User Stamp.
•Top Left
•Top Center
•Top Right
•Center Left
•Center
• Center Right
•Bottom Left
•Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
•Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the User Stamp within the available ranges
shown below.
•Metric version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center Left"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Center Right"…T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• Inch version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center Left"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Center"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Center Right"…T/B: 2.8"-2.8", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
Stamp
111
3
• Page to Stamp
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.
•All Pages
•1st Page Only
❖Stamp Color:1-4
Sets the color registered in User Stamp color (1 to 4).
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
Reference
"User Stamp", Copy/Document Server Reference
Date Stamp
This section describes the user tools in the Date Stamp menu under Stamp.
❖Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
• MM / DD / YYYY
• MM.DD.YYYY
• DD / MM / YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
Default:
•Metric version: DD / MM / YYYY
• Inch version: MM / DD / YYYY
❖Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
•Font 1
•Font 2
•Font 3
Copier / Document Server Features
112
3
❖Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
•Auto
•Large
• Middle
•Small
❖Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
•On
•Off
❖Stamp Color
You can set the selected priority color when printing the date.
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
❖Stamp Setting
Specify how Date Stamp is printed.
•Stamp Position
Specify where to print the Date Stamp.
•Top Left
•Top Center
• Top Right
•Bottom Left
•Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
•Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the Date Stamp within the available ranges
shown below.
•Metric version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Stamp
113
3
• Inch version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
• Page to Stamp
Sets whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first page.
•All Pages
•1st Page Only
Page Numbering
This section describes the user tools in the Page Numbering menu under Stamp.
❖Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page Numbering]
is pressed.
•P1,P2…
• 1/5,2/5…
• -1-,-2-…
• P.1,P.2…
•1,2…
• 1-1,1-2…
❖Font
You can select the page number printed in Page Numbering mode.
•Font 1
•Font 2
•Font 3
❖Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.
•Auto
•Large
• Middle
•Small
❖Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed in Duplex
mode.
•Opposite Position
• Same Position
Copier / Document Server Features
114
3
❖Page Numbering in Combine
You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and the Page
Numbering function together.
•Per Original
•Per Copy
❖Stamp Position on Designating Page
You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Des-
ignate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering function together.
•On
•Off
❖Stamp Position
Specify how each of stamp is printed.
•Stamp Position
Specify where to print the stamp.
•Top Left
•Top Center
• Top Right
•Bottom Left
•Bottom Center
• Bottom Right
•Stamp Position
You can adjust the position of the stamp within the available ranges shown
below.
•Metric version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
• Inch version:
"Top Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Top Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Top Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Left"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
"Bottom Center"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 2.8"-2.8"
"Bottom Right"…T/B: 0.1"-5.7", L/R: 0.1"-5.7"
❖Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap black parts
of the image.
•On
•Off
Stamp
115
3
❖Stamp Color
You can set the selected priority color when printing the date.
•Yellow
•Red
•Cyan
•Magenta
•Green
•Blue
•Black
❖Page Numbering Initial Letter
You can select the page numbering initial letter between "P1, P2.../P.1, P.2..."
and "S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...".
•P1, P2.../P.1, P.2...
• S1, S2.../S.1, S.2...
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Copier / Document Server Features
116
3
Input/Output
This section describes the user tools in the Input/Output menu under Copier /
Document Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Switch to Batch
You can select to have Batch mode or SADF mode displayed when you press
the [Special Original] key.
•Batch
•SADF
❖SADF Auto Reset
In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the pre-
vious original has been fed.
You can adjust this time from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second.
The default setting is 5 second(s).
❖Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Specify to continue copying when paper of the required orientation has run
out during rotate sort.
•On
Copying continues using copy paper of a different orientation. The copy
job will finish even if you have left the machine.
•Off
When paper of the required orientation runs out, the machine stops copy-
ing and prompts you to supply copy paper. After you have loaded paper,
the machine will continue copying.
❖Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make
copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning re-
maining originals.
•On
You can leave the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages
will not be sequential.
•Off
When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to
remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
❖Letterhead Setting
If you select [Yes] in this function, the machine rotates the image correctly.
•Yes
•No
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper might not be printed
correctly depending on how the originals and paper are placed.
Input/Output
117
3
❖Staple Position
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display with pri-
ority.
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is re-
quired to use this function.
•Top 1
•Center
•Left 2
•Top 2
•Bottom 1
•Slant
•Off
❖Punch Type
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be shown on the
initial display.
The optional 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher, or booklet finisher is re-
quired to use this function.
•2 Holes Left
•2 Holes Top
•3 Holes Left
•3 Holes Top
•4 Holes Left
•4 Holes Top
•Off
❖Simplified Screen: Finishing Types
You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for "Finishing
Types" on the Simplified Screen.
•Stack
•Slant
•Top 1
•Bottom 1
•Left 2
•2 Holes Left
•3 Holes Left
•4 Holes Left
•Do not Display
Adjust Color Image
119
3
Adjust Color Image
This section describes the user tools in the Adjust Color Image menu under
Copier / Document Server Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Background Density of ADS (Full Color)
"The background density is adjusted to skip the texture and copy. You can ad-
just the background density up to 5 levels when in Full Color.
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.
❖Color Sensitivity
You can adjust the color specified to convert in "Color Convert" and the color
specified for "Erase Color", in 5 levels.
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.
When the color width has been set to "Wider", and the color to be deleted, for
example is red, all the colors that are close to magenta and orange are deleted.
If it's set to "Narrower" the color red will be deleted.
❖A.C.S. Sensitivity
This 5-step setting determines the level of the standard used for discriminat-
ing between black & white originals and full color originals when "Auto Col-
or Select" is selected.
Center of the 5 level adjustment is set by default.
❖A.C.S. Priority
This setting determines the copy priority between "Black & White" and "Full
Color" when "Auto Color Select" is selected.
•Full Color
• Black & White
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Copier / Document Server Features
120
3
Settings for the Document Server
For details, see "System Settings", and "Copier / Document Server Features".
❖Copier / Document Server Features
❖System Settings
Reference
p.47 “System Settings”
p.91 “Copier / Document Server Features”
Heading items Default
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage 2 Sided Original:
Top to Top
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→
Comb 2 orig
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→
Comb 4 orig
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage 1 sided→
Comb 8 orig
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage Create Margin
General Features Customize Function: Document Server Storage Off
Heading Item Default
General Features Warm-up Beeper On
General Features Copy Count Display Up
General Features Output: Document Server Internal Tray 1
Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority: Copier Tray 1
Tray Paper Settings Cover Sheet Tray Off
Tray Paper Settings Slip Sheet Tray Off
Timer Settings Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer 60 second(s)
Administrator
Tools
Auto Delete File in Document Server 3 day(s)
Administrator
Tools
Delete All Files in Document Server -
121
4. Facsimile Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Facsimile Features menu. For details on
how to access Facsimile Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
General Features
This section describes the user tools in the General Features menu under Facsim-
ile Features.
❖Quick Operation Key (1-3)
Frequently used functions programmed as Quick Operation keys are shown
on the menu immediately after the power is turned on.
If [On] is selected, the Quick Operation keys can be programmed with the fol-
lowing items:
•On
• Manual E-mail RX
• Send Later
•Subject
•Text
• Recept. Notice
• E-mail TX Results
• BCC transmission
• Std. Message
• Fax Header Print
•Label Insertion
•Closed Network
•SUB Code TX
• SEP Code Reception
•Stamp
• Print Memory Lock
•TX File Status
• RX File Status
•Journal
•Print Stored RX File
•TX Status Report
•Forwarding
• Switch RX Mode
•SUB Code TX
•Off
Facsimile Features
122
4
Up to three functions can be programmed to Quick Operation keys.
Functions that appear dimmed have already been set.
❖Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.
• Title 1
• Title 2
• Title 3
❖Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".
You can select from Address Book, or registered LDAP Server.
❖Communication Page Count
Checks the transmission, reception, and totals on the display.
•Transmissions:
Total number of transmitted pages
• Receptions:
Total number of received pages
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Communication Page Count].
DAfter checking the display, press [Exit].
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
❖Adjust Sound Volume
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook Mode and Immediate Transmis-
sion.
• On Hook Mode
• At Transmission
• At Reception
• At Dialing
•At Printing
❖Box Setting
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
•Personal Box
•Information Box
•Transfer Box
For details about Box Setting, see "Box Settings".
❖Box Setting: Print List
You can print a list of the currently registered Personal Boxes, Information
Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.
General Features
123
4
❖On Hook Mode Release Time
Use this function to specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after you transmit
using On Hook dialing.
•1 minute
•3 minutes
•5 minutes
• 10 minutes
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.172 “Box Settings”
"Adjusting the Volume", Troubleshooting
"Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)", Facsimile Reference
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
"Reading the Display", Facsimile Reference
Facsimile Features
124
4
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
❖Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.
For details about programming Scan Size, see "Program / Change / Delete
Scan Size".
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.141 “Program / Change / Delete Scan Size”
Send Settings
125
4
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
❖Max. E-mail Size
When the other party has a limit on the size of e-mail messages that can be
received, or sending data heavy e-mail causes problems, you can make set-
tings to limit the size of sent e-mail. When this function is set to on, transmis-
sion of e-mail that exceeds the set size is aborted.
•On
•Off
When e-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is output, and
the e-mail is deleted.
Even when e-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does
not meet the requirements of the server settings.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Send Settings].
CPress [Max. E-mail Size].
DPress [On].
EEnter the maximum e-mail size using the number keys.
Maximum e-mail size can be between 128 and 102,400 KB.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter
again.
FPress [OK].
Facsimile Features
126
4
❖Program / Change / Delete Standard Message
Program standard messages to be printed at the top of the first page of the
original of the opposite party. It is useful for personalizing messages such as
sending greetings.
You can program three standard messages. You cannot change the "Confi-
dential", "Urgent", "Please phone.", or "Copy to corres. section" messages.
The procedure is the same for both programming and changing.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Send Settings].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete Standard Message].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
To delete the registered message, press [Delete].
ESelect the message you want to program or change.
To delete the registered message, select the message you want to delete,
and then press [Yes].
FEnter a new message.
For details about entering text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
GPress [OK].
To cancel a registration, press [Cancel].
HPress [Exit].
IPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Send Settings
127
4
❖Backup File TX Setting
You can specify whether or not to send to a selected folder the backup of a file
sent by Memory Transmission.
By setting [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] and selecting the destination folder,
you can automatically send to the selected folder the backup of a file sent by
Memory Transmission using the machine’s control panel, Web Image Moni-
tor, DeskTopBinder, or LAN-Fax.
Select the destination folder for the backup file from the address book.
•On
•Off
If you set [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] but the Backup File TX fails, the ma-
chine automatically prints a backup file TX communication failure report.
For details about the communication failure report, see "Communication
failure report", Facsimile Reference.
Using the parameter settings (switch 04, bit 1), specify whether or not to
print a communication failure report.
The backup file format will be the same as that specified for files sent by
Scan to Folder. Using the parameter settings (switch: 21, bit: 3), select TIFF
or PDF as the format for sending a file. The format is factory-preset to TIFF.
Using the parameter settings, you can specify the redial interval (switch 35,
bits 0-7) and the maximum number of redials (switch 36, bits 0-7). The re-
dial interval is factory-preset to 15 minutes; the maximum number of redi-
als, to 192.
Using the parameter settings, (switch 37, bit 0) you can specify whether to
stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Send Settings].
CPress [Backup File TX Setting].
DPress [On].
If there is a folder already programmed, a folder name is shown. If you
want to change the folder, press [Folder] and proceed to step 5.
ESpecify a folder for back up, and then press [OK].
The folder name is shown to the right of [Folder].
FPress [OK].
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
"Communication failure report", Facsimile Reference
"Maximum Values", Facsimile Reference
Facsimile Features
128
4
Reception Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Reception Settings menu under Fac-
simile Features.
❖Switch Reception Mode
Specify the method for receiving fax documents.
• Manual Reception
• Auto Reception
❖Program Special Sender
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can
have Special Senders treated differently.
For details about how to program Special Sender, see "Special Senders to
Treat Differently".
❖Program Special Sender: Print List
You can print the Special Sender List.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Program Special Sender: Print List].
DPress the {Start} key.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the
{Clear/Stop} key.
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
❖Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a pro-
grammed receiver.
•On
•Off
❖Reception File Setting
Selects whether received documents are saved on the hard disk to be printed
later or printed immediately without being saved.
For details about Reception File Setting, see "Reception File Setting".
Reception Settings
129
4
❖Stored Reception File User Setting
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the
machine after fax documents are received. To specify the administrator, enter
the administrator user code for managing documents using Web Image Mon-
itor or DeskTopBinder.
You must register the administrator's User Code to the destination list in advance.
This function is only available when [Store] is selected in "Reception File Setting".
It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor operating under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Stored Reception File User Setting].
DIf you want to use a user code, press [On].
EPress the Destination key of the user you wish to specify, and then press
[OK].
FCheck the selected user, and then press [OK].
When a programmed user is deleted from the destination list, message
"Deleted from Address Book" is displayed. Enter the user again.
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Manage-
ment function under System Settings, you cannot view received and saved
documents using a Web Image Monitor. Select [Off] in step 4 or reprogram the
user code.
❖SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via
SMTP.
•On
•Off
When an authorized e-mail address is set, e-mail received from addresses that
do not match the authorized address is discarded, and an error message is re-
turned to the SMTP server.
The authorized e-mail address is compared with the addresses of e-mail orig-
inators, as illustrated by the following examples.
• When the authorized e-mail address is set to "@aaa.abcd.com":
abc@aaa.abcd.com - accepted
def@aaa.xyz.com - not accepted
abc@abcd.com - not accepted
No Error Report is output even when e-mail is discarded.
Facsimile Features
130
4
APress [On].
BPress [Change], and then enter the sending e-mail address to be authorized.
If you make a mistake, press [Backspace] or [Clear], and then enter again.
CPress [OK] twice.
❖2 Sided Print
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides
of the paper.
•On
•Off
❖Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of
received fax documents.
•On
•Off
❖Center Mark
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be printed halfway down the left
side and at the top center of each page received.
•On
•Off
Reception Settings
131
4
❖Print Reception Time
Specify whether or not the received date, time, and file number are printed at
the bottom of received fax documents.
•On
•Off
❖Reception File Print Quantity
Specify the number of copies to be printed for each fax document received.
• 1 to 10 set(s)
❖Paper Tray
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders
and fax documents from other senders, using different paper trays.
Display of tray names may differ depending on the options installed.
•Tray 1
•Tray 2
•Tray 3 (option)
•Tray 4 (option)
•LCT (option)
•Auto Select
❖Specify Tray for Lines
Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).
•Off
•On
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Specify Tray for Lines], and then press [TNext].
DPress [On].
If you select [Off], the received fax is delivered to a default tray.
Facsimile Features
132
4
ESelect the line type.
FSelect a tray to deliver the received paper onto, and then press [OK].
If you want to specify another line type, repeat from step 5.
❖Folder Transfer Result Report
You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the
specified e-mail address, when folders are programmed as the forwarding
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.
You must first register the destination for the Folder Transfer Result Report
in the destination list. See "Registering a Fax Destination".
Specify a group destination to transfer documents to multiple destinations. A
maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group. See "Registering Names
to a Group".
Even if the Folder Transfer Result Report is not successfully transmitted, the
report is not printed on this machine.
•E-mail
•Do not E-mail
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [TNext].
DPress [Folder Transfer Result Report].
ETo send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [E-mail].
To not send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [Do not E-mail], and
then press [OK].
FPress [Notify Destination].
GPress the Destination key of the e-mail address for notification, and then
press [OK].
HCheck the selected destination, and then press [OK].
IPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reception Settings
133
4
❖Memory Lock Reception
When you switch Memory Lock on, received documents are stored in mem-
ory and not printed automatically. When a document is received in the Mem-
ory Lock mode, the Confidential File indicator blinks. To print this document,
enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot print the document.
This prevents unauthorized users from accessing the document. To use Mem-
ory Lock, program the Memory Lock ID, and then switch Memory Lock on.
To store incoming documents from Special Senders only in Memory Lock,
program each sender with "Special Senders to Treat Differently".
This function is not available with Internet Fax.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings], and then press [TNext].
CPress [TNext].
DPress [Memory Lock Reception].
ESelect [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
FPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.139 “Reception File Setting”
p.49 “Output: Facsimile (facsimile)”
p.159 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”
p.135 “Program Memory Lock ID”
p.225 “Registering a Fax Destination”
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”
Facsimile Features
134
4
Initial Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Initial Settings menu under Facsimile
Features.
❖Parameter Setting
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
For details about Parameter Setting, see "Parameter Settings".
❖Parameter Setting: Print List
You can print Parameter Setting list.
Print this list to see the current User Parameter settings. However, not all the
parameter settings are printed.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Parameter Setting: Print List].
DPress the {Start} key.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the
{Clear/Stop} key.
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
❖Program Closed Network Code
Register an ID required for Closed Network communication.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program Closed Network Code].
DEnter an ID using the number keys and [A] to [F], and then press [OK].
Register a four-digit number using 0 to 9 and A to F (except for 0000 and
FFFF).
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Initial Settings
135
4
❖Program Memory Lock ID
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when
the Memory Lock function is activated.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program Memory Lock ID].
DEnter an ID using the number keys, and then press [OK].
A Memory Lock ID can be any four-digit number, except 0000.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
❖Internet Fax Settings
You can select to display the Internet Fax icon or not. When you want to send
an Internet Fax, set On to display the icon.
•On
•Off
❖Select Dial / Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type when the machine is connected to a G3
analog line.
Dial and Push lines are available for selection.
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, settings for the extra G3
lines appear.
This function is not available in some regions.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Select Dial / Push Phone].
DPress [Push Button Phone] or [Dial Phone (10PPS)] to select the line, and then
press [OK].
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Facsimile Features
136
4
❖Program Fax Information
Program information to be shown on the display of the other machine and
printed as a report. The following information can be programmed.
•Fax Header
•Own Name
•Own Fax Number
For details about how to program Fax Information, see "Registering Fax In-
formation".
❖Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-Fax transmission.
•On
•Off
❖Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax transmission.
•On
•Off
❖H.323 Settings
Set the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number of the gate-
keeper.
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the gatekeeper server.
See "Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 0).
You can use numbers, and symbols ("#" and "*") for registration of the alias
telephone number in H.323 Settings. Make sure you enter these characters
correctly.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [H.323 Settings].
DPress [Change] for each property.
EEnter the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number and
press [OK].
FPress [OK].
Initial Settings
137
4
❖SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name.
If you select [On] using the User Parameters, you can use the SIP server. See
"Parameter Settings" ( switch 34, bit 1).
You can use alphanumeric symbols (lower and upper cases) and symbols (";",
"?", ":", "&", "=", "+", "$", ",", "-", "_", ".", "!", "~", "*", "#", "‘", "(", ")", "%", "/", and
"@") for registration of the SIP User Name in SIP Settings. Make sure you enter
these characters correctly.
Use numbers and periods (".") to enter the correct IPv4 addresses for the gate-
keeper, SIP server, and gateway. To obtain the correct IPv4 addresses, consult
the administrator.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [SIP Settings].
DPress [Change] for each property.
A proxy server relays call requests and responses.
A redirect server processes request destination inquiries.
A register server registers location information of user agents (which cor-
respond to telephones or facsimiles on public telephone lines) on an IP net-
work.
EEnter the IPv4 address or host name, and SIP user name, and then press
[OK].
FSpecify whether to perform SIP digest authentication.
If you select [On], enter the password using up to 128 characters.
GPress [OK].
❖Program / Change / Delete Gateway
Register, change, or delete the gateway used for transmission to IP-Fax.
• Program / Change
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress a gateway to register.
When registering a new gateway, press [Not Programmed].
Facsimile Features
138
4
FPress [Change] for "Prefix".
GEnter the Prefix using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To change the existing prefix, press [Clear], and then enter a new prefix.
For documents sent using a gateway to G3 Fax, prefixes can be used. If
the first several digits of IP-Fax number and the gateway- specific prefix
are identical, documents can be transmitted using the registered digits
of the gateway. For example, if both 03 and 04 have been registered as
gateway number while 0312345678 is also specified, documents can be
transmitted via a gateway for which 03 is used as a prefix.
When you wish to use the gateways regardless of the IP-Fax destination
numbers, register only the gateway addresses without registering the
prefix.
HSelect a protocol.
IPress [Change] for Gateway Address.
JEnter the gateway address, and then press [OK].
KPress [OK].
• Delete
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
DPress [Delete], and then select a gateway to delete.
EPress [Yes] on the confirmation message.
If you do not want to delete the gateway you have selected, press [No].
FPress [Exit].
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.133 “Memory Lock Reception”
p.144 “Registering Fax Information”
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
p.162 “Memory Lock”
Reception File Setting
139
4
Reception File Setting
Specify whether received documents are to be saved on the hard disk or printed
immediately without being saved. You can print stored documents repeatedly
or download them as images to a computer using a Web Image Monitor or Desk-
TopBinder. If you select printing without saving, documents are printed each
time they are received.
If you have used System Settings to specify to have received faxes distributed to
the delivery server, the documents cannot be saved on the hard disk.
Important
❒The optional printer/scanner unit is required.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Reception File Setting].
DPress [Print] or [Store], and then press [OK].
To cancel your selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepC.
When [Store] is selected, you can select whether or not to send notice of recep-
tion to a specific e-mail address. To notify of reception, press [Notify Destina-
tion] and select an e-mail address from the Internet Fax destinations
programmed in the address book. Further, you can register a group destina-
tion. In such a case, a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a
group.
Facsimile Features
140
4
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can use "Parameter Settings" (switch 10, bit 5) to select whether or not
to print stored received documents. See "Parameter Settings".
❒If [Store] is selected and a destination for notification is specified, notifica-
tion of document reception can be sent to the specified e-mail address.
❒Documents saved on the hard disk are categorized as received and stored
documents.
❒You cannot change to a different setting if received documents have been
stored on the hard disk. To change to a different setting, print documents
stored on the hard disk if necessary, and then delete them.
❒Received confidential documents are stored in memory. Use the Print Con-
fidential RX File function to print them.
❒With [Store] selected, more memory space is used as the number of saved
documents increases. After memory space becomes insufficient, no more
documents are saved on the hard disk. When this happens, the machine
starts printing then overwriting old documents.
❒You can store received documents up to a total of approximately 320 pages
or 2,240 pages of A4 size Standard <ITU-T#1Chart>.
❒You cannot send received documents.
❒You cannot manage stored documents from the Document Server display.
❒It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored
RX File)", Facsimile Reference
"Sending Stored Documents", Facsimile Reference
Reception Report e-mail
When a received document is stored, this report is sent to the e-mail address set
as the destination for notification.
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
141
4
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
Program frequently used scan sizes.
Important
❒When programming or changing a scan size, it is recommended that you make
a record of the new size.
When you select a scan size to scan a custom size original, two custom sizes are
available (Program Size 1 and Program Size 2). Use these functions to program
a custom size in advance. The procedure is the same for programming and
changing.
You can program up to two sizes.
Specify a horizontal length from 128 to 1200 mm, or from 5.5 to 47 inches.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Scan Settings].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
DSelect [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
Facsimile Features
142
4
EEnter a horizontal size using the number keys.
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".
If you enter a length and press [mm] or [inch], the length is converted automat-
ically according to the unit (fractions are rounded off). For example, when
you enter {2}, {2}, and {0} in millimeters and change to "inch", the length "8.7
inch" is shown on the display. If you press [mm] or [inch] again, "221 mm" is
displayed.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
FSelect a vertical size, and then press [OK].
The displayed vertical size differs depending on the selected unit. When [mm]
is selected, [Auto Detect], [210 mm (A4)], [257 mm (B4 JIS)], [297 mm (A3)], [216 mm
(8 1/2)], and [279 mm (11)] are shown. When [inch] is selected, [Auto Detect], [8.3
inch (A4)], [10.1 inch (B4 JIS)], [11.7 inch (A3)], [8.5 inch], and [11.0 inch] are shown.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
143
4
Deleting a scan size
Delete programmed scan size.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Scan Settings].
CPress [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
DPress [Delete], and then select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
EPress [Delete].
To cancel deleting, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of stepD.
FPress [Exit].
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Facsimile Features
144
4
Registering Fax Information
You can send information to the other party when transmitting or receiving a fax
document. This information is shown on the display of the other machine and
printed as a report. The following information can be sent.
Important
❒You can confirm programmed settings from the User Parameter List. It is rec-
ommended that you print and keep the User Parameter List when you pro-
gram or change settings. See "Parameter List".
❒In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
you send. Required in the USA.
❖Fax Header
The Fax Header is printed as the header of every fax you send. You should
include your name in the Fax Header.
You can program Fax Header1 or Fax Header2. When you send originals us-
ing the destination list, you can select which Fax Header is printed on the doc-
ument received by the other party.
You can register "Fax Header" using up to 32 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
You can use characters, symbols, numbers, and spaces.
You can set whether or not to print a Fax Header using [Fax Header Print] under
Options . See "Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
❖Own Name
The Own Name is sent to the other party when you send or receive a fax . This
name should include your name. The Own Name is shown on the display of
the other machine and printed in a report.
Own Name can be used only if the other machine is of the same manufacturer
and has the Own Name function.
You can register "Own Name" using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
❖Own Fax Number
The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when sending a fax.
The received facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine
and printed in a report.
This function is available regardless of the manufacturer of the other party's
machine.
You can register "Own Fax Number" using up to 20 numbers, space, and
"+"symbol.
Reference
"Fax Header Print", Facsimile Reference
Registering Fax Information
145
4
Registering Fax Information
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program Fax Information].
DSelect the Fax Information you want to register or change.
ERegister the name and facsimile number.
FPress [Exit].
GPress the {User tools/Counter} key.
Registering a Fax Header
ACheck that [Fax Header] is selected.
BPress [First Name] or [Second Name].
CEnter a fax header including your Own Name and Fax Number, and then
press [OK].
Facsimile Features
146
4
Registering an Own Name
APress [Own Name].
BPress [Own Name].
CEnter your own name, and then press [OK].
Registering an Own Fax Number
APress [Own Fax Number].
BSelect line type to program.
The display differs depending on the optional units installed on the machine.
CEnter your own facsimile's number using the number keys, and then press
[OK].
To enter a + sign or a space, press [+] or [Space].
Registering Fax Information
147
4
Changing Fax Information
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program Fax Information].
DSelect the Fax Information you want to change.
To change a Fax Header, see "Registering a Fax Header".
To change Own Name, see "Registering an Own Name".
To change Own Fax Number, "Registering an Own Fax Number".
EPress [Exit].
FPress the {User tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.145 “Registering a Fax Header”
p.146 “Registering an Own Name”
p.146 “Registering an Own Fax Number”
Deleting Fax Information
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Program Fax Information].
DPress [Fax Header], [Own Name], or [Own Fax Number] to delete.
EPress the item you want to delete.
FPress [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then press [OK].
When deleting your own facsimile's number, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop}
key, and then press [OK].
G[Exit].
HPress the {User tools/Counter} key.
Facsimile Features
148
4
Forwarding
Print documents received and forward to a specified End Receiver. This is useful
if, for example, you are visiting another office and would like a copy of your doc-
uments to be sent to that office.
You can also specify a "folder" as the forwarding destination.
Important
❒To use this function, set Forwarding under Reception Settings to On (enable).
❒You can select end receivers only from among destinations programmed in
the Address Book. You cannot specify programmed transfer stations as end
receivers.
A fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder can be set as the
forwarding destination.
Even when [On] is selected for "Forwarding" in "Reception Settings", if [Off] is se-
lected for the forwarding destination in this function, only printing is per-
formed, not forwarding.
When you wish to change the end receivers depending on the senders, specify
the end receivers by the senders, at "Program Special Sender". Documents not re-
ceived from specified senders are sent to the destination specified in this func-
tion.
You can specify whether or not to print forwarded documents. See "Parameter
Settings"(switch 11, bit 6).
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination
list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be
registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is transmitted to
the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can set
which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See "Parameter Set-
tings" (switch 32, bit 0).
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this func-
tion.
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
Reference
p.121 “General Features”
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
p.128 “Reception Settings”
p.159 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”
Forwarding
149
4
Programming an End Receiver
Important
❒One end receiver can be registered for each special sender. To register two or
more end receivers, use group destination. However, a maximum of 500 des-
tinations can be specified in a group.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Forwarding].
DPress [On].
If there is an End Receiver already programmed, a receiver name is shown. If
you want to change the receiver, press [Receiver] and proceed to stepE.
To cancel Forwarding, press [Off]and proceed to stepF.
Facsimile Features
150
4
ESpecify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [OK].
The receiver name is shown to the right of [Receiver].
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
Set a folder destination in Address Book Management under Administrator
Tools in the System Settings menu. See "Registering Folders".
If you have specified a folder for forwarding, you can specify the file format
used for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
FPress [OK].
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
p.240 “Registering Folders”
Forwarding
151
4
Quitting the forwarding function
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Forwarding].
DPress [Off], and then press [OK].
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Forwarding Mark
You can print a Forwarding Mark on receiver's documents that have been for-
warded.
The receiver can distinguish between forwarded and normally received documents.
This function is not available when memory forwarding is performed to a folder
destination.
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
Facsimile Features
152
4
Parameter Settings
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To
change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches.
❖Switches and Bits
Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist of
eight bits, whose values are "0" or "1". The right most bit is bit 0 and the left
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the
value of bits between "0" and "1".
•Switch 02
❖User Parameter List
User Parameter Switches are outlined in the following table.
00111011
↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓
76543210
Switch Bit Item 0 1
02 0 Forwarding Mark Off On
02 3 TSI Print Off On
03 0 Automatic printing of the Communication
Result Report
Off On
03 2 Automatic printing of the Memory Storage
Report
Off On
03 3 Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Reserve
Report automatically.
Off On
03 4 Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Result
Report automatically.
Off On
03 5 Automatic printing of the Immediate TX Result
Report
Off On
03 7 Automatic printing of the Journal Off On
04 0 Automatic printing of the Confidential File
Report
Off On
04 1 Automatic printing of Communication Failure
Report and Transfer Result Report
Off On
04 4 Indicates the parties Off On
04 5 Include sender's name on reports Off On
04 7 Include a portion of the image on reports Off On
05 0 Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substi-
tute Reception during service call)
Possible
(Substitute
RX)
Not possible
(Reception
off)
Parameter Settings
153
4
05 2,1 Substitute the reception when the machine
cannot print (because paper is jammed, all
paper trays have run out of paper, toner is
empty, or all paper trays are out of order)
00: Enabled
uncondi-
tionally
(Free)
01: Enabled
when Own
Name/
Own Fax
Number is
received
10: Enabled
for Closed
Network
Code match
11: Disabled
(Reception
off)
-
05 5 Print sheet is limited to that which has high-
est priority.
Off On
05 7 Empty tray alert (Paper Empty Warning)
even when one paper tray is empty
Off On
07 0 Whether or not to produce a beeping sound
when the machine receives a fax.
Beep Do not send
a voice
message.
07 2 Parallel Memory Transmission Off On
08 2 Authorized Reception Type Receive
from speci-
fied send-
ers only.
Receive all
documents
except from
specified
senders.
10 3 Page reduction when printing Off On
10 5 Reception file setting Off On
10 6 Use both e-mail notification and printed re-
ports to confirm the transmission results
Off On
11 6 Local print when forwarding Off On
14 0 Print documents received with Auto Power-
On Reception (Night Printing mode)
Immediate
printing
(On)
When turn-
ing on the
operation
switch
(Off)
14 1 Long Document Transmission (Well Log) Off On
14 3 Reset when function changed Off On
Switch Bit Item 0 1
Facsimile Features
154
4
15 0, 1, 2 Selecting the available paper feed tray. 001: Tray 1
010: Tray 2
011: Tray 3
100: Tray 4
101: Large
Capacity
Tray (LCT)
-
15 5 Whether or not to select the available paper
feed tray.
Off On
17 2 Whether you need to press [Add] after speci-
fying a destination with the Destination key
when broadcasting
Not neces-
sary
Necessary
17 3 Whether or not to reset the settings when
original is scanned.
On Off
17 7 Receive documents by pressing the {Start}
key when originals are not set.
Off (no doc-
uments re-
ceived after
pressing the
{Start} key)
On (docu-
ments re-
ceived after
pressing the
{Start} key)
18 0 Print date with Fax Header Off On
18 1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Header Off On
18 2 Print file number with Fax Header Off On
18 3 Print page number with Fax Header Off On
19 0 Use paper delivery shift function (Offset
Print)
Off On
19 1 Sort Journal by line type Off On
20 0 Automatic printing of the LAN-Fax Result
Report.
Off On
Switch Bit Item 0 1
Parameter Settings
155
4
20 5,4,3,2 Reprinting time of stored documents in
memory that could not be printed using
LAN-Fax Driver
0000:
0 minutes
0001:
1 minutes
0010:
2 minutes
0011:
3 minutes
0100:
4 minutes
0101:
5 minutes
0110:
6 minutes
0111:
7 minutes
1000:
8 minutes
1001:
9 minutes
1010:
10 minutes
1011:
11 minutes
1100:
12 minutes
1101:
13 minutes
1110:
14 minutes
1111:
15 minutes
-
21 0 Print results of sending Reception Notice Re-
quest message
Off
(print only
when an er-
ror occurs)
On
21 1 Respond to e-mail reception acknowledg-
ment request
Off On
21 3 File format for files forwarded to folder des-
tinations
TIFF PDF
21 4 Transmit Journal by E-mail Off On
21 6 Display Network error Display
(On)
Not display
(Off)
21 7 Transmit Error Mail Notification On Off
22 0 Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when
using the telephone line (LINE)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
Switch Bit Item 0 1
Facsimile Features
156
4
22 1 Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when
using the telephone line (LINE2)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
22 2 Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when
using the telephone line (LINE3)
Not detect
(Off)
Detect
(On)
24 0 Store documents that could not be transmit-
ted in memory
Off On
24 1 Length of time documents that could not be
transmitted are stored in memory
24 hours 72 hours
24 2 Whether to retain the stored file permanently No Yes
32 0 Select which order of priority to be used to
select an alternative destination when there
is no destination of the specified type.
Paper Out-
put Priority
<Priority
Order>
1. IP-Fax
destination
2. Fax num-
ber
3. E-mail ad-
dress
4. Folder
Electronic
Output Pri-
ority
<Priority
Order>
1. E-mail ad-
dress
2. Folder
3. IP-Fax
destination
4. Fax num-
ber
34 0 Use gatekeeper server with IP-Fax Off On
34 1 Use SIP server with IP-Fax Off On
35 7, 6, 5,
4, 3, 2,
1, 0
Redial interval when sending a backup file 00000000:
0 minute(s)
00000001:
1 minute(s)
00000010:
2 minute(s)
.
.
00001111:
15 minute(s)
.
.
11111111:
25 5
minute(s)
Switch Bit Item 0 1
Parameter Settings
157
4
36 7, 6, 5,
4, 3, 2,
1, 0
Maximum number of redials when sending a
backup file
00000000:
1 time(s)
00000001:
2 time(s)
00000010:
3 time(s)
.
.
11000000:
195 time(s)
.
.
11111111:
254 time(s)
37 0 Whether to stop sending a backup file if the
destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax
or the backup file
No Yes
37 3, 2 Whether to print the backup file if it cannot
be sent
00:
Do not print
01:
Print first
page only
10:
Print whole
file
Switch Bit Item 0 1
Facsimile Features
158
4
Changing the User Parameters
This section describes how to set parameters.
Important
❒Access to some User Parameter Settings may require options, or other settings
may need to be made beforehand.
❒It is recommended that you print and keep a User Parameter list when you
program or change a User Parameter.
❒Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the previous pages.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Initial Settings].
CPress [Parameter Setting].
DSelect the switch number you want to change.
ESelect the bit number you want to change.
When the bit number is pressed, the current value switches between 1 and 0.
Repeat from stepE to change another bit number for the same switch.
FPress [OK].
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepD.
GRepeat stepD through stepE to change the switch settings.
HAfter all the settings are finished, press [Exit].
IPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Special Senders to Treat Differently
159
4
Special Senders to Treat Differently
By programming particular senders in advance, you can set the following func-
tion for each sender:
•Authorized RX
•Forwarding
•Reception File Print Qty
•Print 2 Sided
•Memory Lock
• Paper Tray
Use Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your senders. If the sender has
a machine of the same manufacturer, program an Own Name that has already
been programmed as a sender. If the machine is not from the same manufacturer,
Own Fax Number is used.
You can apply the same settings to all programmed numbers. You can then cus-
tomize the settings for individual numbers as necessary using the Special Sender
Registration function.
The following items can be programmed.
•Special Senders
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered. A maximum of 20 characters can
be used or each name when using G3.
• Full/Partial agreement
When you program own names and facsimile names for multiple destinations,
you can program a common sequence of characters to identify destinations.
Using Partial matching
You can program up to 30 wild cards.
Spaces are ignored when identifications are compared.
You can use wild cards for the following functions:
•Forwarding
•Special Senders
• Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
When using Partial agreement, you can enter up to the first 24 characters of
an e-mail address to use it as an own name or facsimile name.
Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
NEW YORK BRANCH
HONG KONG BRANCH
SYDNEY BRANCH
3
Destination to be programmed
(Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
BRANCH 1
Facsimile Features
160
4
Note
❒You cannot program senders as Special Senders if they do not have Own
Name or Own Fax Number programmed.
❒The machine cannot differentiate between Polling Reception and Free Polling
documents from Special Senders.
❒You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax receptions.
•Authorized RX
• Reception File Print Qty
•Memory Lock
❒You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.
❒To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided, or Paper Tray with Internet Fax reception,
program the sender's e-mail address.
❒You can check Own Name and Own Fax Number using the Journal. You can
check programmed Special Senders using the specified sender list.
❒If you select "Off" for the Special Sender function in "Initial Set Up", the set-
tings will be the same as the Reception Settings.
Authorized Reception
Use this function to limit incoming senders.
The machine only receives faxes from programmed Special Senders, and there-
fore, it helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk mail, and saves
wasting fax paper.
Note
❒To use this function, program the Special Senders function, and then select
"On" in "Authorized RX" with "Reception Settings". See "Parameter Settings"
(switch 08, bit 2).
❒Without programming Special Senders, the Authorized RX function will not
work, even if you select "On".
❒If you select "Off" for "Authorized RX" in "Initial Set Up", settings are the same
as the Reception Settings.
❒You can change Special Senders in the same way as you program them.
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
Facsimile Reference "Reception Settings"
Special Senders to Treat Differently
161
4
Reception File Print Quantity
Print the specified number of copies of documents received from programmed
senders (Special Senders).
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine prints the specified
number of copies for all received documents.
Note
❒You cannot use multi-copy printing with Memory Lock.
❒You can specify up to 10 copies.
Forwarding
Print received documents, and then transfer them to those receivers pro-
grammed beforehand.
Folder destination can be registered.
It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special
Senders.
Note
❒To use this function, program your Special Senders, and then select "On" for
"Forwarding" in "Reception Settings".
❒If you specify "On" in "Forwarding" and select [Same as Basic Settings], the fax doc-
ument is forwarded to the receivers programmed in "Specify End Receiver.".
❒If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incom-
ing documents to the other end receivers specified in "Specify End Receiver.".
❒You can set the fax destination, Internet fax destination, IP-Fax destination or
folder destination, as a forward destination.
❒Set folder destinations using the Address Book Management function under
System Settings. See "Registering Folders".
Reference
p.148 “Forwarding”
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference
Print 2 Sided
Print on both sides of the paper.
Note
❒If you select the bypass tray for "Paper Tray", duplex printing is disabled.
Facsimile Features
162
4
Memory Lock
Store incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Senders) in
memory without printing them. People without the Memory Lock ID cannot
print the documents, and therefore this function is useful for receiving confiden-
tial documents . If you do not program any senders, the machine receives fax
document from all senders using Memory Lock reception.
Important
❒You must register Memory Lock ID in advance.
❒If you program the same sender in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forward-
ing is disabled.
Reference
p.135 “Program Memory Lock ID”
Paper Tray
Print documents received from programmed senders (Special Senders) and the
documents from other senders on different types of paper.
For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1 and white paper is in Tray 2, the machine
prints the documents from Special Senders on the blue paper and prints the doc-
uments from other senders on the white paper, making it easy for you to sepa-
rate the two.
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine outputs documents re-
ceived from all senders using the default paper tray.
Note
❒If the machine receives a document that has a different size from the paper in
the specified tray, the machine prints it after splitting it or minimizing its size.
❒Selection of the bypass tray enables you to specify the paper size in "Scan Ar-
ea".
Reference
"Placing Originals", Facsimile Reference
Special Senders to Treat Differently
163
4
Programming/Changing Special Senders
Program and change Special Senders.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Program Special Sender].
DCheck [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the sender to program or change.
FEnter a sender name, and then press [OK].
Enter a destination name using Own Name or Own Fax Number.
GPress [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agreement].
Facsimile Features
164
4
HSelect the item you want to program.
You must select only the item you want to program.
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of stepE.
IPress [OK].
A Special Sender is programmed.
To program another sender, repeat the procedure from stepE.
JPress [Exit].
KPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
p.159 “Full/Partial agreement”
p.165 “Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)”
p.166 “Forwarding”
p.165 “Reception File Print Qty”
p.167 “Print 2 Sided”
p.167 “Memory Lock”
p.167 “Paper Tray per Sender”
Special Senders to Treat Differently
165
4
Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
APress [Authorized Reception per Sender].
BPress [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
Reception File Print Qty
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
APress [RX File Print Quantity per Sender].
BPress [Number of Sets].
CEnter the print quantity using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Note
❒Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
"RX File Print Qty" of "Reception Settings".
❒If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
Facsimile Features
166
4
Forwarding
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
Important
❒One forward destination can be registered for each Special Sender. To register
two or more forward destinations, use group destinations. However a maxi-
mum of 500 destinations can be specified in a group.
APress [Forwarding per Sender].
BSelect [On] or [Off].
If you select [Off], proceed to stepD.
CPress the Destination key of a forward destination, and then press [OK].
DPress [OK].
Note
❒Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
"Forwarding" under "Administrator Tools".
❒Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between
fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
❒When a folder is specified as the forward destination, you can set a file for-
mat for forwarding. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 21, bit 3).
❒Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destina-
tion list causes the settings of the forward destination to be deleted, so they
must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document is
transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the speci-
fied type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative desti-
nation. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
❒After you perform stepJ, set "Forwarding" of "Reception Settings" to "On".
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
p.240 “Registering Folders”
Special Senders to Treat Differently
167
4
Print 2 Sided
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
APress [2 Sided Print per Sender].
BPress [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
Note
❒Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for "2
Sided Print" of "Reception Settings".
Memory Lock
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
APress [Memory Lock Reception per Sender].
BPress [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
Note
❒Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
"Program Memory Lock ID" under "Administrator Tools".
Paper Tray per Sender
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
APress [Paper Tray per Sender].
BSelect the tray you want to use, and then press [OK].
Note
❒Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for
"Paper Tray" of "Reception Settings".
Facsimile Features
168
4
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender
Program the "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. You can also specify the Bypass
Tray Paper Size.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Program Special Sender].
DPress [Initial Set Up].
ESelect the function you want to program.
In this feature, "Authorized RX" has the same settings as "Reception Settings".
FTo program Authorized RX and Special RX Function, press [Authorized Re-
ception] or [Special Reception Function].
Special Senders to Treat Differently
169
4
GPress [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
The illustration shows the "Authorized RX" display as an example.
HTo program Bypass Tray Paper Size, press [Bypass Tray Paper Size].
You can select a size from [Auto Detect], [Regular Size], or [Custom Size].
If you select [Auto Detect], proceed to stepsI and N.
If you select [Regular Size], proceed to stepsI, J and N.
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to stepsI and K to N.
ISelect the size you want to program.
If you select [Regular Size], select a paper size displayed, and then proceed to
stepN.
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to stepK.
JSelect the size you want to program from the sizes shown.
KMake sure that [Vertical] is selected.
Facsimile Features
170
4
LEnter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
Specify a vertical size from 90 mm (3.6") to 305 mm (12.0"). You cannot enter
a size smaller than 90 mm or larger than 305 mm.
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is con-
verted automatically (fractions are rounded off).
MEnter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
Specify a horizontal size from 148 mm (5.9") to 600 mm (23.7"). You cannot en-
ter a size smaller than 148 mm or larger than 600 mm.
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between "mm" and "inch".
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is con-
verted automatically (fractions are rounded off).
NPress [OK].
OPress [Exit].
PPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒If you select [Auto Detect], the machine recognizes the paper size automati-
cally.
Reference
"Reception Settings", Facsimile Reference
Special Senders to Treat Differently
171
4
Deleting a Special Sender
Use this function to delete "Initial Set Up" of a Special Sender. The Bypass Tray
Paper Size can also be deleted.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [Reception Settings].
CPress [Program Special Sender].
DPress [Delete], and then select the Special Sender you want to delete.
EPress [Yes].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [No]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
FPress [Exit].
GPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Facsimile Features
172
4
Box Settings
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
•Personal Box
• Information Box
•Transfer Box
❖SUB Code and SEP Code
SUB Code and SEP Code are IDs consisting of up to 20 digits, and can include
numbers, #, *, and spaces.
To use this function, you must program a box and SUB/SEP Code before-
hand. The other party can send documents to, and retrieve stored documents
from, this box using the code.
Note
❒The combined total of items that can be stored using the Personal Box, Infor-
mation Box, and Transfer Box functions is 150.
❒You cannot set the same Box code on two different boxes.
❒Transmission or programming may not be allowed if there is not enough free
memory left. The amount of free memory left differs depending on the op-
tional equipment installed.
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes
This section describes how to program Personal Boxes.
You can program the following items:
•Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters long
• SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
• Receiver (optional)
You can program one delivery destination for each Personal Box. Specify a
delivery destination programmed in Destination key.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Box Settings
173
4
ESelect a box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it and proceed to stepH.
FPress [Personal Box].
GEnter a box name, and then press [OK].
HEnter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change a Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from step G.
ISpecify the settings you require.
If you do not want to program a password or receiver, proceed to stepP.
JPress [Password].
Facsimile Features
174
4
KEnter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
LRe-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat stepsK
and L, or press [Cancel] and repeat from stepJ.
MPress [OK].
NPress [Receiver].
OSelect a destination using the destination list, and then press [OK].
Press the key on the left of the display to switch the destination between fax
number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.
PPress [OK].
QPress [Exit].
Box Settings
175
4
RPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
❒Specify a fax number, Internet Fax destination and IP-Fax destination as
the transmission destination.
❒The Fax Header is not printed on delivered documents.
❒If a document cannot be delivered, a Communication Failure Report is
printed and the document is saved as a Confidential Reception document.
❒You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes
that are being used cannot be edited.
❒If a destination in the destination table is deleted after being registered, de-
livery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Personal Boxes", Facsimile Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Deleting Personal Boxes
This section describes how to delete Personal Boxes.
Important
❒If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DPress [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
Facsimile Features
176
4
EIf the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
FPress [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Programming/Changing Information Boxes
This section describes how to set up an Information Box.
You can store the following items:
•Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters long
• SEP Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Box Settings
177
4
ESelect the box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to stepH. If
a password is programmed, enter the password, press [OK], and then proceed
to stepH.
FPress [Information Box].
GEnter a box name, and then press [OK].
HEnter the SEP Code.
To change the SEP Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change the box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat the proce-
dure from stepG.
IPress [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to stepL.
Facsimile Features
178
4
JEnter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
KRe-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
LPress [OK].
MPress [Exit].
NPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes
that are being used cannot be edited.
❒If a destination in the destination list is deleted after being registered, de-
livery is not performed and the settings of the delivery destination are also
deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is changed, a document is sent
to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified type,
you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See
"Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Information Boxes", Facsimile Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Box Settings
179
4
Deleting Information Boxes
This section describes how to delete Information Boxes.
Important
❒If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DPress [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
EIf the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
FPress [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of
stepD.
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Facsimile Features
180
4
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes
This section describes how to set up an Transfer Box.
This function turns the machine into a fax relay station. Documents sent with a
SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are re-
ceived, and then relayed to a programmed receiver.
Since documents can be sent to multiple destinations in a single transfer request,
you can economize on call charges when sending to distant destinations.
Inform the Requesting Party of the SUB Code assigned to the Transfer Box.
When they want to have a document transferred by your machine, ask them to
send the document using SUB Code Transmission and specifying this SUB
Code. If a password has also been programmed, inform them of this too, and ask
them to enter it as the SID code.
You can store the following items:
•Box name (required)
Up to 20 characters
• SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
•End Receiver (required)
You can store five End Receivers (destinations to which documents are for-
warded) for each box. Specify End Receivers using a single or group destina-
tion programmed in the destination list beforehand.
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits 0-9, "#", "*", and spaces
(the first character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed in front of the Box
name.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Box Settings
181
4
ESelect the box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to stepH.
FPress [Transfer Box].
GEnter a Box name, and then press [OK].
HEnter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try
again. To change Box name, press [Box Name], and then repeat from stepG.
ITo Program End Receivers, Select an Receiving Station.
You can store five Receiving Station.
Facsimile Features
182
4
JSpecify End Receivers with Destination keys, and then press [OK].
You can change the display to the fax destination, Internet fax destination,
and IP-Fax destination using the key on the left side of the display.
A reception station can also be registered as a group destination. In such a
case, a maximum of 500 parties including End Receivers 1-5 can be specified
in a group.
To register another End Receiver, repeat from stepI.
KTo program a password, press [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to stepN.
LEnter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
MRe-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing
[OK], and then try again.
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Change] and repeat stepsL
and M, or press [Cancel] and repeat from stepK.
NPress [OK].
OPress [Exit].
Box Settings
183
4
PPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒After documents are transferred, Transfer Result Reports are not sent back
to the sender.
❒Specify the Internet fax destination and IP-Fax destination as a reception
station.
❒After documents are transferred, they are deleted.
❒When this function is set to on, the machine prints out the received docu-
ments it transfers and a Transfer Result Report after the transfer has fin-
ished. If you do not want it to print, contact your service representative.
❒When the programmed receiver is a group destination for Multi-step
Transfer, Multi-step Transfer takes place. For more information, contact
your service representative.
❒You can edit boxes in the same way you program them.
❒If you delete a destination specified as a reception destination using the
destination list, the settings of the reception destination are also deleted, so
they must be registered again. When a destination is changed, a document
is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the spec-
ified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative desti-
nation. See "Parameter Settings" (switch 32, bit 0).
Reference
p.152 “Parameter Settings”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Deleting Transfer Boxes
This section describes how to delete Transfer Boxes.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting].
DPress [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
Facsimile Features
184
4
EIf the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key, and then try again.
FPress [Delete].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns
to that of stepD.
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Printing the Box List
Print a list showing the currently programmed Personal Boxes, Information Boxes,
and Transfer Boxes.
APress [Facsimile Features].
BPress [General Features].
CPress [Box Setting: Print List].
DPress the {Start} key.
After printing the list, you can then start from stepC.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the {Start} key, press [Cancel] or the
{Clear/Stop} key. The display returns to that of stepC.
To cancel printing a list after pressing the {Start} key, press [Stop Printing]. The
display returns to that of stepC.
EPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
185
5. Printer Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Printer Features menu. For details on
how to access Printer Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
Test Print
This section describes the user tools in the Test Print menu under Printer Fea-
tures.
❖Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
❖Configuration Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
❖Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The most
recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are
30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the oldest error
belongs to one of the following types of print jobs, it is not deleted. Instead, it will
be stored separately in error logs for each job type, up to a maximum of 30 for
each log. You can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
•Sample Print
•Locked Print
•Hold Print
•Stored Print
The records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control
panel can be printed.
❖Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
❖PCL Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
❖PS Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is in-
stalled.
❖PDF Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Printer Features
186
5
Printing the configuration page
APress [Printer Features].
BPress [Configuration Page] on the [List / Test Print].
The configuration page is printed.
CPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Interpreting the configuration page
❖System Reference
•Unit Number
Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
•Total Memory
Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.
• Firmware Version
•Printer
Displays the version number of the printer firmware.
•System
Displays the version number of the system firmware.
•Engine
Displays the version number of the printer engine.
•LCDC
Displays the version number of the panel display.
•NIB
Displays the version number of the Network interface.
• Device Connection
This item(s) appears when the device option(s) is installed.
• HDD: Font / Macro Download
Displays the capacity of the hard disk drive.
• Printer Language
Displays the version number of the printer driver language.
Test Print
187
5
• Connection Equipment
Displays the installed optional equipments.
❖Paper Input
Displays settings made under Tray Paper Settings menu.
❖System
Displays settings made under the System menu.
❖PCL Menu
Displays settings made under PCL Menu.
❖PS Menu
Displays settings made under PS Menu.
❖PDF Menu
Displays settings made under PDF Menu.
❖Host Interface
Displays settings made under the Host Interface menu.
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IPv4 address, subnet mask
and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
❖Interface Information
Displays the interface information.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Printer Features
188
5
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in the Maintenance menu under Printer Fea-
tures.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖List / Test Print Lock
You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.
•On
•Off
❖Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
❖Delete All Stored Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
❖4 Color Graphic Mode
•Text Priority
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for text printing.
•Photo Priority
Use the optimum CMYK toner combination for photo printing.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
p.47 “System Settings”
System
189
5
System
This section describes the user tools in the System menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Print Error Report
Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error oc-
curs.
•On
•Off
❖Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
•Off
• Immediate
•1 minute
•5 minutes
• 10 minutes
• 15 minutes
❖Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
•Do not Print
•Error Information
❖Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
•On
•Off
❖Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily stored in the ma-
chine.
•On
•Off
If you select [On], you can set up to 200 hours for auto file deleting.
❖Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the machine.
•On: 3 day(s)
•Off
If you select [On], you can set up to 180 days for auto file deleting.
Printer Features
190
5
❖Initial Print Job List
You can set the desired type of print job list that appears on the screen when
you press [Print Jobs].
•Complete List
Displays the list of print jobs stored in the machine.
•List Per User ID
Displays the list of the User ID who stored a file in the machine.
❖Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,
according to paper size or resolution.
• Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
•Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
❖Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each page.
•Off
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
❖Copies
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the num-
ber of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another
command.
The number of copies can be specified from 1 to 999 by increments of one.
Default: 1
❖Blank Page Print
You can select whether or not to print blank pages.
•On
•Off
Pages that match one of the following conditions are identified as blank.
• There are no images.
• There are images but they are outside the printable area.
• There are only blank characters.
❖Reserved Job Waiting Time
You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a print job before allow-
ing other functions such as the copier and scanner functions to interrupt it.
•Long Wait
• Medium Wait
•Short Wait
•In Reserved Job Order
System
191
5
❖Printer Language
Specify the printer language.
•Auto
•PCL
•PS
•PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4, LT) feature.
•Auto
•Off
❖Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
•The paper size you can select is as follows:
11×17, 81/2×14, 81/2×13, 81/2×11, 81/4×13, 8×13, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2,
41/8×91/2, 31/8×71/2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B4JIS, B5JIS, B6JIS, C5 Env, C6 Env,
DL Env, 8K, 16K, Custom Size
Default: Metric version: A4, Inch version: 81/2×11
❖Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted pa-
per requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rotation.
•Off
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
•Auto Detect
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted
paper automatically, and does not rotate the image.
• On (Always)
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate.
This function reduces printing speed.
❖Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Specify whether (Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Settings, has prior-
ity for determining the paper size for the bypass tray.
•Driver / Command
• Machine Settings
❖Edge to Edge Print
You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.
•Off
•On
The 5 mm margin along the edges may not be printed properly.
Printer Features
192
5
❖Default Printer Language
You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer
language automatically.
•PCL
•PS
•PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
•Off
•On
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Loading paper", Troubleshooting
Host Interface
193
5
Host Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Host Interface menu under Printer
Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
•128KB
• 256KB
❖I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you
should increase this timeout period.
• 10 seconds
•15 second(s)
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Printer Features
194
5
PCL Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PCL Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
•Portrait
•Landscape
❖Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
The number of lines can be specified from 5 to 128 by increments of one.
Default: Metric version: 64, Inch version: 60
❖Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
•Resident
•RAM
•HDD
•SD
RAM, HDD and SD can be selected only when fonts have been downloaded
to the machine.
❖Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
The number of font numbers can be specified from 0 to 63 by increments of
one.
The default setting is 0.
❖Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
The number of point sizes can be specified from 4.00 to 999.75 by increments
of 0.25.
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
The default setting is 12.00.
❖Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
The number of characters per inch can be specified from 0.44 to 99.99 by in-
crements of 0.01.
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
The default setting is 10.00 pitches.
PCL Menu
195
5
❖Symbol Set
Specify the character set of the selected font. The available options are as fol-
lows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK, Win
L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8, PS
Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60,
ISO 69, Win 3.0
❖Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
•Regular
•Dark
❖Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
•Off
•On
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
❖Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF,
FF=CR−FF.
•Off
•On
❖Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
• 300 dpi
•600 dpi (Fast)
• 600 dpi (Standard)
• 600 dpi (High Quality)
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Printer Features
196
5
PS Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PS Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
❖Data Format
You can select a data format.
•Binary Data
•TBCP
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or
EtherTalk connection.
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is can-
celed under the following conditions:
• The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the
display panel is Binary Data.
• The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on
the display panel is TBCP.
❖Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
•600 dpi (Fast)
• 600 dpi (Standard)
• 600 dpi (High Quality)
❖Color Setting
You can make an RGB setting.
•Off
•Fine
•Super Fine
❖Color Profile
You can set the color profile.
•Auto
•Presentation
• Solid Color
• Photographic
• User Setting
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
PDF Menu
197
5
PDF Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PDF Menu under Printer Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Change PDF Password
Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Current Password
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the pass-
word information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the
password using this menu from the Control Panel.
❖PDF Group Password
Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder.
• Current Password
• New Password
• Confirm New Password
A password can be set using the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the pass-
word information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the
password using this menu from the Control Panel.
❖Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
•600 dpi (Fast)
• 600 dpi (Standard)
• 600 dpi (High Quality)
❖Color Setting
You can make an RGB setting.
•None
•Fine
•Super Fine
199
6. Scanner Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Scanner Features menu. For details on
how to access Scanner Features, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
General Settings
This section describes the user tools in the General Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.
❖Update Delivery Server Destination List
Press [Update Delivery Server Destination List] to update the receivers from the
delivery server. To use this function, it is necessary to set [Delivery Option] to
[On].
❖Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in "Search Destination".
To search from LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in
[System Settings] and set [LDAP Search] to [On].
❖TWAIN Standby Time
When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as Doc-
ument Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the machine
as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN scanner
function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switches to the
network TWAIN scanner function.
•Off
When [Off] is selected, the machine will switch to the network TWAIN
scanner function at once.
•On: 10 sec.
When [On] is selected, you can enter the delay time with the number keys
(3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the network TWAIN scanner
function when the time set here passes after the last key operation.
❖Destination List Display Priority 1
Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.
You can select either [E-mail / Folder] or [Delivery Server].
• E-mail / Folder
•Delivery Server
Scanner Features
200
6
❖Destination List Display Priority 2
In the machine’s address book, select which address book appears by default.
You can select either [E-mail Address] or [Folder].
•E-mail Address
•Folder
❖Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If
the stored transmission/ delivery results reach 100, select whether to print
the delivery journal.
•On
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed
journal is deleted.
•Off
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are
stored.
• Do not Print: Disable Send
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest
record.
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.
❖Print Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is printed and deleted.
❖Delete Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
Scan Settings
201
6
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
Sets the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning orig-
inals when [Scan Type] is set to [Auto Color Select].
❖Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
To divide originals and scanning them individually with the exposure glass
to form a single file, select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] for the wait-
ing status.
•Continuous Wait
•Off
•Set Wait Time: 60 sec.
If you select [SADF] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the [Wait
Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid.
If you select [Batch] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the
[Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid, and the ma-
chine waits for an additional original to be placed.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start if additional
originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed within this time. You can
end scanning and begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this
time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for additional originals
until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals
are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {q} key.
If originals are placed in the ADF (auto document feeder), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF
•Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
Scanner Features
202
6
❖Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF
When dividing originals and scanning them separately with the ADF to form
a single file, select [Set Wait Time] or [Continuous Wait] for the waiting status.
•Continuous Wait
•Set Wait Time: 60 sec.
This setting is valid if [SADF] is specified for [Original Feed Type] when scan-
ning.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start automatically
if additional originals are placed within this time. You can end scanning and
begin transmission by pressing the {q} key within this time. Once the spec-
ified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for the additional origi-
nals until the {q} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional origi-
nals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {q} key.
Even if originals are placed on the exposure glass, the machine will operate
according to the specified settings. However, every time originals are placed
on the exposure glass, you must press the {Start} key to start scanning. Scan-
ning will start if additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed
within this time. You can end scanning and begin transmission by pressing
the {q} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmis-
sion starts automatically.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations are performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {q} key is pressed.
• Changing the settings such as the scan settings
• Opening the upper cover of the ADF
•Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
❖Background Density of ADS (Full Color)
Characteristics due to the type of paper such as nonwhiteness like newspaper
or transparent originals can be reduced by correcting the scanning density.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Batch, SADF", Scanner Reference
"Items for Specifying Scan Settings", Scanner Reference
"Setting Items for Original Feed Type", Scanner Reference
"Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File", Scanner Reference
Send Settings
203
6
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Scanner
Features.
Default settings are shown in bold type.
❖Compression (Black & White)
Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.
•On
•Off
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
❖Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)
Specify whether or not to compress multi-level (grayscale / full color) scan
files.
•On
•Off
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for
file transfer increases accordingly.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
❖High Compression PDF Level
Select compression level when creating high compression PDF files.
•Higher
•Standard
❖Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is at-
tached.
•On
•Off
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-102400 KB) with the number
keys.
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.
Scanner Features
204
6
❖Divide & Send E-mail
This function is effective only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail.
•Yes (per Max. Size)
•Yes (per Page)
•Off
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2-
500) with the number keys.
When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multi-page: PDF] is selected for [File Type], the image
will not be divided even if [Yes (per Page)] is selected.
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.
When [No] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.
❖E-mail Information Language
Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, document
name, and sender's name is sent.
Select one of the following 20 languages:
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Dan-
ish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.
❖No. of Digits for Single Page Files
Sets digit number for serial number to attach to Single Page file name.
•4 Digits
•8 Digits
❖Stored File E-mail Method
Specify the e-mail setting for sending stored files. You can select [Send File] or
[Send URL Link]. This setting can be used for the following:
•Send File
Sending Stored Files by E-mail
• Send URL Link
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail
If you select [Send File], actual files are attached to e-mails.
If you select [Send URL Link], URL Links to file locations are attached to e-
mails.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
205
7.
Registering Addresses and Users
for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
This chapter describes how to register destinations and users in the Address
Book. For details on how to access System Settings, see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
Address Book
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.
Important
❒Address Book data is stored on the hard disk. It can be lost if there is some
kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any
damages resulting data loss.
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:
❖Names
You can register the name of the user and the key display. This is the basic in-
formation required for managing user of the machine.
To register a fax number or e-mail address in the address book, you must reg-
ister information such as the user name and destination name in advance.
❖Auth. Info
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to fold-
ers, or accessing an LDAP server.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
206
7
❖Protection
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders
from being accessed without authorization.
❖Fax Dest.
You can register fax numbers, line, fax header and select label insertion.
When using IP-Fax, you can register the IP-Fax destination and select the pro-
tocol.
❖E-mail
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.
Address Book
207
7
❖Folder
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.
•SMB
•FTP
•NCP
❖Add to Group
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier
management.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
208
7
Note
❒You can also use a Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book.
With the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can register multiple names at
the same time. For details about using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Im-
age Monitor Help.
❒Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can
backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the
Address Book. For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min Help.
Managing names in the Address Book
By registering a name and key display beforehand, you can specify e-mail and
folder destinations simply by selecting the name key.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
Sending fax by Quick Dial
Register a fax number in the Address Book so you can specify it only by selecting
the fax destination, shown on the fax initial display when sending a fax. When
label insertion is set to "On", the receiver's name and standard messages are
printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.
By registering IP-Fax destinations in the Address Book, you can specify a desti-
nation simply by selecting it from the destinations that appear in the initial fax
display. Registered IP-Fax numbers can be used and printed as sender’s IP-Fax
numbers.
Reference
p.223 “Fax Destination”
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial
By registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book, you can specify e-mail des-
tinations simply by selecting them from the fax initial display when sending a
document by Internet fax.
You can also specify an e-mail address by selecting the destination shown on the
initial scanner display when sending a document using the scanner function. A
registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's
addresses are automatically entered in the "From" field of an e-mail header.
Reference
p.236 “E-mail Destination”
Address Book
209
7
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly
After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a
shared folder simply by selecting the destination shown on the initial scanner
display whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared folder.
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.
Reference
p.240 “Registering Folders”
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine
After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.
Reference
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”
Managing users and machine usage
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
•Copier
• Document Server
• Facsimile
•Scanner
•Printer
Reference
p.214 “Authentication Information”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
210
7
Registering Names
Register user information including their names.
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending faxes or e-mail.
You can also use it as a folder destination.
You can register up to 2000 names.
Registering Names
This section describes how to register names.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress [New Program].
FPress [Change] on the right of the Name.
The name entry display appears.
GEnter the name, and then press [OK].
Registering Names
211
7
HPress the key for the classification you want to use under Select Title.
The keys you can select are as follows:
•[Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
•[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]: Added
to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.
IPress [OK] twice.
JPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒The name can be used for documents in the Document Server. For details
about the Document Server, see "Using the Document Server", Copy/ Doc-
ument Server Reference.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
"Using the Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
212
7
Changing a Registered Name
This section describes how to change a name.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the registered name you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
FTo change the name or key display, press [Change] on the right of the name
or key display.
GEnter the name or key display, and then press [OK].
HTo change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from
Select Title.
ITo change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..
JEnter a new registration number using the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
KPress [OK].
LPress [Exit].
MPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail
address, or IP-Fax destination.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Registering Names
213
7
Deleting a Registered Name
This section describes how to delete a name.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
FPress [Yes].
GPress [Exit].
HPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
214
7
Authentication Information
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Important
❒The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code be-
come invalid.
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Facsimile
Scanner
Printer
Note
❒You can register up to 500 user codes.
❒The number of copies made of documents stored in the Document Server us-
ing the facsimile function is counted for each user code. This allows you to
check each user's usage.
❒The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.
❒To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Printer: PC Con-
trol] for the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in
User Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver.
❒For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver
Help.
Reference
p.81 “User Authentication Management”
Authentication Information
215
7
Registering a User Code
This section describes how to register a user code.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress the name whose code is to be registered, or enter the registered num-
ber using the number key.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Auth. Info].
GEnter the user code using the number keys, and then press {q} key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.
HPress [TNext] twice.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
216
7
ISelect the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.
JPress [OK].
KPress [Exit].
LPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒You can enter a one-to eight-digit user code.
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
Changing a User Code
This section describes how to change a user code.
Important
❒Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Authentication Information
217
7
ESelect the user whose user code you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Auth. Info].
GPress [Change], and then enter the new user code using the number keys
HPress {q} key.
ITo change the available functions, press [Auth. Info] and then press [TNext]
twice.
JPress the key to select the functions to enable them.
Press the key to highlight it, and then the function is enabled. To cancel a selec-
tion, press the highlighted key.
KPress [OK].
LPress [Exit].
MPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
218
7
Deleting a User Code
This section describes how to delete a user code.
Important
❒After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose code is to be deleted.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Auth. Info].
GPress [Change] to delete the user code, and then press {q} key.
HPress [OK].
IPress [Exit].
Authentication Information
219
7
JPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒To delete a name from the Address Book entirely, see "Deleting a Registered
Name".
Reference
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Displaying the Counter for Each User
This section describes how to display the counter for each user.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].
DSelect the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter] or [Scanner Counter].
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.
Printing the Counter for Each User
This section describes how to print the counter for each user.
APress [System Settings].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
220
7
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].
DSelect a user code from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
EPress [Print Counter List] under Per User.
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.
FSelect the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
GPress [Print].
Authentication Information
221
7
Printing the Counter for All Users
This section describes how to print the counter for all users.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].
DPress [Print Counter List] under All Users.
Enter the user code, and then press {q} if the user code is registered.
ESelect the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
FPress [Print].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
222
7
Clearing the Number of Prints
This section describes how to clear the counter.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Display / Clear / Print Counter per User].
DSelect the user code to clear.
ETo clear the number of prints made under a user code, select the user code
from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
FPress [Clear] under Per User.
GSelect the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
HPress [OK].
ITo clear the number of prints for all user codes, press [Clear] under All Users.
JSelect the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter],[Fax Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
KPress [OK].
Fax Destination
223
7
Fax Destination
Register a fax destination so you do not need to enter fax numbers each time, and
can send documents that have been scanned in using the facsimile function.
• It is easy to select the fax destination if you register "Name" and "Key Display"
for the fax destination.
• You can register fax destinations as a group. For details about registering a
group, see "Registering Names to a Group".
• You can register fax destinations by selecting them from redial function.
• Registered Fax numbers can be used as sender's Fax numbers.
There are two types of fax destination, as shown below:
• Fax Destination
Select this to send the fax over the telephone network.
•IP-Fax
Select this to send the fax to a machine on a TCP/IP network.
You cannot send the fax to a machine on another network if that network is
behind a firewall.
You can program the following items in a fax destination:
❖Fax number
Registers the destination's fax number. You can enter a fax number using up
to 128 digits. You must include every digit in the number.
❖SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.
❖SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP
Code", Facsimile Reference.
❖Line
If the optional extra G3 interface unit is installed, you can select the line type
per destination.
❖International TX mode
When setting the International TX mode to [On], the machine transmits more
carefully by lowering transmission speed. However, communication times
increase.
❖Fax header
You can select to print a fax header on fax messages the other party receives.
The default is "1st Name".
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
224
7
❖Label insertion
Use label insertion to print information such as the destination name on the
sheet printed out at the destination.
Data is printed as follows:
•Destination Name
The destination name specified in [Fax Destination] is printed with "To" be-
fore it at the top of the sheet.
• Standard Message
A registered two-line sentence is printed under "Destination Name".
To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax desti-
nations and also press [Label Insertion] when sending fax documents.
Fax header and label insertion are also printed when sending by e-mail using
the fax function.
You can program a standard message other than those registered in the ma-
chine. See "Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages", Fac-
simile Reference
You can program the following items in an IP-Fax Destination:
❖IP-Fax
Register the IP-Fax destination. You can register the name using up to 128
characters. You must make this setting when using IP-Fax.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
❖SUB Code
Registering a SUB Code allows you to use Confidential Transmission to send
messages to the other fax machines which support a similar function called
"SUB Code". See "SUB Code", Facsimile Reference.
❖SEP Code
Registering a SEP Code allows you to use Polling Reception to receive faxes
from the other fax machines which support Polling Reception. See "SEP
Code", Facsimile Reference.
❖Select Protocol
Select the protocol for the IP-Fax transmission.
This setting only works if the IP-Fax function has been selected.
Reference
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”
Fax Destination
225
7
Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a fax number.
Registering a Fax Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose fax destination you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
GEnter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK] under
Facsimile No..
HSpecify optional settings such as "SUB Code", "SEP Code", and "Interna-
tional TX mode".
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
226
7
IPress [OK].
Note
❒When a group is registered, you can also add this fax destination to the group.
For details about registering groups, see "Registering Names to a Group".
❒To register the name, see "Registering Names".
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.227 “Using a Fax Destination as a sender”
p.227 “To change the line”
p.228 “To change the SUB Code”
p.228 “To change the SEP Code”
p.228 “To set the International TX Mode”
p.228 “To select the fax header”
p.229 “To set label insertion”
p.258 “Registering Names to a Group”
Changing a Fax Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose fax destination you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
GChange the settings.
Fax Destination
227
7
HPress [OK].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
p.227 “To change the fax number”
p.227 “To change the line”
p.228 “To change the SUB Code”
p.228 “To change the SEP Code”
p.228 “To set the International TX Mode”
p.228 “To select the fax header”
p.229 “To set label insertion”
Using a Fax Destination as a sender
APress [Protection].
BPress [Sender] on the right side of Use Name as.
To change the fax number
APress [Change]under Facsimile No..
BEnter the new fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To change the line
APress [Select Line].
BSelect the line, and then press [OK].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
228
7
To change the SUB Code
APress [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].
BPress [Change] under TX SUB Code.
CEnter the new SUB Code, and then press [OK].
DTo change the password, press [Change] under Password (SID).
EEnter the new password, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
To change the SEP Code
APress [Adv. Features], and then press [SEP Code].
BPress [Change] under RX SEP Code.
CEnter the new SEP Code, and then press [OK].
DTo change the password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).
EEnter the new password, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
To set the International TX Mode
APress [Change] under International TX Mode.
BSelect [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].
To select the fax header
You can register the fax header in Program Fax Information in the system set-
tings for Facsimile Features.
APress [Change] under Fax Header.
BSelect [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].
Reference
p.144 “Registering Fax Information”
Fax Destination
229
7
To set label insertion
When Label Insertion is set to ON, the receiver's name and standard messages
are printed on the fax message when it is received at the other end.
APress [Change] under Label Insertion.
BPress [On].
CPress [Change] under Line 2.
DSelect the new standard message or press [Manual Entry] to enter the new
message.
EEnter the new message, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
GPress [Change] under Line 3.
HSelect the new standard message, and then press [OK].
IPress [OK].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered
Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
Deleting a Fax Destination
Important
❒If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to
its registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check
the settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
230
7
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose fax destination you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
GPress [Change] under Facsimile No..
HPress [Delete All].
IPress [OK] twice.
JPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Fax Destination
231
7
IP-Fax Destination
This section describes how to register a IP-Fax destination.
Note
❒For details about sending an IP-Fax, "Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference.
Reference
"Sending by IP-Fax", Facsimile Reference
Registering an IP-Fax Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to register.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
GPress [Select Line], and then select [H.323] or [SIP].
HPress [Change] under "Fax Destination".
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
232
7
IEnter the IP-Fax destination.
JPress [OK] twice.
Note
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.215 “Registering a User Code”
p.257 “Registering Names to a Group”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Changing a Registered IP-Fax Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to change.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
Fax Destination
233
7
GPress [Change] under "Fax Destination".
HEnter the new destination, and then press [OK].
IPress [OK].
JPress [OK].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Using the IP–Fax Destination as the sender
APress [Protection].
BPress [Sender] under [Use Name as].
To change the IP-Fax Destination
APress [Change] under [Use Name as].
BEnter the new destination, and then press [OK].
To select the protocol
APress [Select Line].
BSelect [H.323] or [SIP].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
234
7
To program the SUB Code
APress [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].
BPress [Change] under TX SUB Code.
CEnter the SUB Code, and then press [OK].
DTo enter a password, press [Change] under Password (SID).
EEnter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
To program the SEP Code
APress [Adv. Features], and then press [SUB Code].
BPress [Change] under RX SEP Code.
CEnter a SEP Code using the number keys, and then press [OK].
DTo enter a password, press [Change] under Password (PWD).
EEnter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
FPress [OK].
To set the International TX Mode
APress [Change] under International TX Mode.
BSelect [Off] or [On], and then press [OK].
To select the fax header
APress [Change] under Fax Header.
BSelect [1st Name] or [2nd Name], and then press [OK].
Fax Destination
235
7
Deleting a Registered IP-Fax Destination
If you delete a destination that is a specified delivery destination, messages to its
registered Personal Box, for example, cannot be delivered. Be sure to check the
settings in the fax function before deleting any destinations.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose IP-Fax destination you want to delete. Press the
name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Fax Dest.].
GPress [Change] under "Fax Destination".
HPress [Delete All].
IPress [OK] twice.
JPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
236
7
E-mail Destination
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every
time, and can send scan files from scanner or fax function by e-mail.
• It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register "Name" and "Key Dis-
play" as the e-mail destination.
• You can register e-mail destinations as a group.
• You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the send-
er address to prevent unauthorized access.
Note
❒You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in
the Address Book. See "Sending Scan File by E-mail", Scanner Reference.
❒You can set the machine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail
whenever a transmission is sent. See Facsimile Reference You can set the ma-
chine to send a Transmission Result Report by e-mail whenever a transmis-
sion is sent. See Facsimile Reference.
Reference
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”
Registering an E-mail Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose e-mail address you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
FPress [E-mail].
E-mail Destination
237
7
GPress [Change].
HEnter the e-mail address.
IPress [OK].
JSelect [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination] or [Internet Fax Destination Only].
KIf you want to use Internet fax, specify whether or not to use " Send via SMTP
Server".
LPress [OK].
Note
❒You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.215 “Registering a User Code”
p.258 “Registering Names to a Group”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
238
7
Changing an E-mail Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose e-mail address you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [E-mail].
GPress [Change] under E-mail Address.
HEnter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].
IPress [OK].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
E-mail Destination
239
7
Using the e-mail address as the sender
APress [Protection].
BPress [Sender] under [Use Name as].
Deleting an E-mail Destination
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [E-mail].
GPress [Change] under E-mail Address.
HPress [Delete All].
IPress [OK] twice.
JPress the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Note
❒To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
240
7
Registering Folders
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.
There are three types of protocol you can use:
•SMB
For sending files to shared Windows folders.
•FTP
Use when sending files to an FTP server.
•NCP
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.
Note
❒For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your net-
work administrator.
❒You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the ma-
chine. See "Registering a Protection Code".
❒You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after fin-
ishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.
Using SMB to Connect
Note
❒To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect".
❒To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".
Reference
p.246 “Using FTP to Connect”
p.251 “Using NCP to Connect”
Registering an SMB Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
Registering Folders
241
7
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose folder you want to register. Press the name key, or
enter the registered number using the number keys.
FPress [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
GPress [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
HPress [Change] under Login User Name.
IEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
JPress [Change] under Login Password.
KEnter the password, and then press [OK].
LEnter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
MPress [Folder].
NPress [SMB].
OPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
PPress [Exit].
QPress [OK].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
242
7
RPress [Exit].
Note
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
❒You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
❒To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
❒If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies.
❒If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.242 “To locate the SMB folder manually”
p.243 “To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network”
To locate the SMB folder manually
APress [Change] under Path.
BEnter the path where the folder is located.
CPress [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],
and then enter the path again.
Note
❒Enter the path using this format: "\\ServerName\Share- Name\PathName".
❒You can also enter an IPv4 address.
❒You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
Registering Folders
243
7
To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network
APress [Browse Network].
The client computers sharing the same network as the machine appear.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
BSelect a client computer.
Shared folders under it appear.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
CSelect the folder you want to register.
D[OK].
If a Login Screen Appears
This section explains how to log on to the machine if the login screen appears
when you try to access a folder by browsing the network.
If you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or
password has been entered for folder authentication, the login screen appears.
AEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.
BEnter the password, and then press [OK].
The path to the selected folder appears.
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and
password again.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
244
7
Changing an SMB Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose folder you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
GSelect the items you want to change.
When specifying a folder, enter the path directly or select it by referencing the
network. For more information, see "To locate the folder manually" and "Us-
ing Browse Network to locate the folder".
HPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
IPress [OK].
JPress [Exit].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
Registering Folders
245
7
To change the protocol
APress [FTP] or [NCP].
BA confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
CEnter each item again.
Reference
p.246 “Registering an FTP Folder”
Deleting an SMB registered folder
A[System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
246
7
GPress the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
HPress [Yes].
IPress [OK].
JPress [Exit].
Note
❒To delete the name, key display, and title, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Using FTP to Connect
Note
❒To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect".
❒To register a folder in an NetWare server, see "Using NCP to Connect".
Reference
p.240 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.251 “Using NCP to Connect”
Registering an FTP Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose folder you want to register.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
Registering Folders
247
7
FPress [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
GPress [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
HPress [Change] under Login User Name.
IEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
JPress [Change] under Login Password.
KEnter the password, and then press [OK].
LEnter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
MPress [Folder].
NPress [FTP].
OPress [Change] under Server Name.
PEnter the server name, and then press [OK].
QPress [Change] under Path.
REnter the path.
SPress [OK].
TPress [Change] under "Port No."
UEnter Port No..
VPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
WPress [Exit].
XPress [OK].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
248
7
YPress [Exit].
Note
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
❒You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.
❒You can enter an absolute path, using this format: "/user/ home/user-
name"; or a relative path, using this format: "directory/sub-directory".
❒If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current
working directory.
❒You can also enter an IPv4 address.
❒You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
❒To change the port number, press [Change] under Port No.. Enter the port
number using the number keys, and then press {q}.
❒You can enter 1 to 65535.
❒If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected, the FTP User Name and FTP Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
❒If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.242 “To locate the SMB folder manually”
p.243 “To locate the SMB folder using Browse Network”
Changing an FTP Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
Registering Folders
249
7
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose folder you want to change, and then press [Folder].
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
GSelect the items you want to change.
HPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
IPress [OK].
JPress [Exit].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
To change the protocol
APress [SMB], or [NCP].
BA confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
CEnter each item again.
Reference
p.240 “Registering an SMB Folder”
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
250
7
Changing items under FTP
APress [Change] under Port No.
BEnter the new port number, and then press {q}.
CPress [Change] under Server Name.
DEnter the new server name, and then press [OK].
EPress [Change] under "Path".
FEnter the new path, and then press [OK].
Deleting an FTP Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect the name whose folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
GPress the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
HPress [Yes].
IPress [OK].
Registering Folders
251
7
JPress [Exit].
Note
❒To delete a name entirely, see "Deleting a Registered Name".
Reference
p.213 “Deleting a Registered Name”
Using NCP to Connect
Note
❒To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see "Using SMB to Connect"
❒To register a folder in an FTP server, see "Using FTP to Connect"
Reference
p.240 “Using SMB to Connect”
p.246 “Using FTP to Connect”
Registering an NCP Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
GPress [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
HPress [Change] under Login User Name.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
252
7
IEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
JPress [Change] under Login Password.
KEnter the password, and then press [OK].
LEnter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
MPress [Folder].
NPress [NCP].
OSelect "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
PSpecify the folder.
QPress [OK].
RPress [Exit].
Note
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the user name.
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
❒If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], enter the user name followed
by the name of the context where the user object is located. If the user name
is "user" and the context name is "context", enter "user.context"
❒To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
❒If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.253 “To locate the NCP folder manually”
p.253 “To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Registering Folders
253
7
To locate the NCP folder manually
APress [Change] under Path.
BEnter the path where the folder is located.
C[OK].
DPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
EPress [Exit].
Note
❒If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".
❒If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the NetWare server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
❒You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.
❒If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
To locate the NCP folder using Browse Network
APress [Browse Network].
BIf you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the
NetWare server appears.
CSearch for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
DSelect the folder you want to register.
E[OK].
Note
❒Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].
❒If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.
❒Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
254
7
Changing an NCP registered folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the user of the registered folder you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
GSelect "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to spec-
ify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
HSpecify the folder.
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network.
IPress [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
JPress [OK].
KPress [Exit].
Note
❒To change the name, key display and title, see "Changing a Registered Name".
Reference
p.212 “Changing a Registered Name”
Registering Folders
255
7
To change the protocol
APress [SMB], or [FTP].
BA confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
CEnter each item again.
Reference
p.240 “Registering an SMB Folder”
p.246 “Registering an FTP Folder”
Deleting an NCP Folder
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DPress [Delete].
ESelect a user of the folder you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Folder].
GPress the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
HPress [Yes].
IPress [OK].
Registering Names to a Group
257
7
Registering Names to a Group
You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail addresses
and folders for each group.
To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.
Important
❒When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group
with over 50 folders registered.
❒The maximum number of destinations registerable to a group is 500.
Note
❒You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders
registered in a group. For details, see "Registering a Protection Code".
Reference
p.267 “Registering a Protection Code”
Registering a Group
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress [New Program].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
258
7
FPress [Change] under Group Name.
GEnter the group name, and then press [OK].
The Key Display name is set automatically.
HPress the title key under Select Title, if necessary.
The keys you can select are as follows:
•[Frequent]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
•[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]…
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Frequent] and one more page for each title.
IWhen you want to change the key display, press [Change] under Key Dis-
play. Enter the key display, and then press [OK].
JPress [OK].
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Registering Names to a Group
You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.
APress [System Settings].
Registering Names to a Group
259
7
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name to register in a group.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Add to Group].
GSelect a group to which you want to add the name to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
added to it.
HPress [OK].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
260
7
Adding a Group to Another Group
You can add a group to another group.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the group that you want to put into another group.
Press the group key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Add to Group].
Registering Names to a Group
261
7
GSelect the group which you want to add to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the group is
added to it.
HPress [OK].
Displaying Names Registered in a Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
262
7
ESelect the group where the members you want to check is registered.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Programmed User/Group].
All the names registered will be displayed.
GPress [OK].
Removing a Name from a Group
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name to remove from a group.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Add to Group].
Registering Names to a Group
263
7
GSelect the group from which you want to remove the name.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
added to it.
HPress [OK].
Deleting a Group Within Another Group
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
264
7
ESelect the group that you want to delete from.
Press the group key, or enter the registered number during the number keys.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Add to Group].
The keys of groups in which the group is registered appear highlighted.
GSelect the group that you want to delete from.
The group key is deselected and the group is deleted from it.
H[OK].
Registering Names to a Group
265
7
Changing a Group Name
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress the group key you want to change.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FTo change the group name and key display, press [Change] under Group
Name or Key Display.
GEnter the new group name or key display, and then press [OK].
HTo change the title, press the title key under Select Title.
ITo change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..
JEnter the new registration number using the number keys.
KPress the {q} key.
LPress [OK].
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
266
7
Deleting a Group
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DPress [Delete].
EPress [Yes].
FPress a group key you want to delete.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
GPress [Yes].
Registering a Protection Code
267
7
Registering a Protection Code
You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection
code.
You can use this function to protect the following:
•Folders
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.
•Sender's names
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.
Reference
p.215 “Registering a User Code”
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
ESelect the name whose protection code you want to register.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
268
7
FPress [Protection].
GPress [Destination] or [Sender] under Use Name as.
Both [Destination] and [Sender] can be selected at the same time.
HPress [Change] under Protection Code.
IEnter a protection code using the number keys, and then press {q}.
JPress [OK].
KPress [Exit].
Note
❒Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Pro-
tection" without specifying a protection code.
Registering a Protection Code
269
7
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress the group key you want to register or enter the registered number us-
ing the number keys.
FPress [Protection].
GPress [Folder Destination] under Protection Object.
HPress [Change] under Protection Code.
IEnter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
JPress [OK].
KPress [Exit].
Note
❒Specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify "Pro-
tection" without specifying a protection code.
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
270
7
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name and
Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Transfer
settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
EPress the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
FPress [Auth. Info].
GPress [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of SMTP Authentication.
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
271
7
HPress [Change] under Login User Name.
IEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
JPress [Change] under Login Password.
KEnter the password, and then press [OK].
LEnter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
M[OK].
Note
❒To register the name, see Registering Names".
❒You can enter up to 191 characters for the user name.
❒When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 char-
acters.
❒You can enter up to 64 characters for the password.
❒To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
p.14 “Network Settings”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
272
7
LDAP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand. For details, see
"LDAP Server Settings", Network Guide.
Important
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server of
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details, see "LDAP Server Settings".
APress [System Settings].
BPress [Administrator Tools].
CPress [Address Book Management].
DCheck that [Program / Change] is selected.
You can search by the registered name, fax number, folder name, e-mail address,
or IP-Fax destination.
EPress the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys.
FPress [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
GPress [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of LDAP Authentication.
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication
273
7
HPress [Change] under Login User Name.
IEnter the login user name, and then press [OK].
JPress [Change] under Login Password.
KEnter the password, and then press [OK].
LEnter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
MPress [OK].
Note
❒To register the name, see "Registering Names".
❒When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program / Change LDAP Server
of Administrator Tools settings applies.
❒You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❒To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
p.210 “Registering Names”
"Entering Text", About This Machine
Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions
274
7
275
8. Other User Tools
Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of
printed papers by displaying the counter. For details on how to access respective
settings, see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in Maintenance.
[Maintenance] allows color drift and gradient correction.
❖Auto Color Calibration
If a certain color is strong or the color of the copy differs from the original, adjust
the yellow, magenta, cyan and black balance.
❖Color Registration
If the color documents show registration shifting, perform automatic color
registration.
Note
❒For details about "Auto Color Calibration" and "Color Registration", see "Mainte-
nance", Troubleshooting.
Reference
p.3 “Accessing User Tools”
"Maintenance", Troubleshooting
Inquiry
277
8
Inquiry
The inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs,
or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer
to verify the following:
❖Consumables
• Telephone No. to order
•Toner
•Staple
• Staple (Center)
•TX Stamp Name
❖Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No.
• Serial No. of Machine
❖Sales Representative
• Telephone No.
APress [Inquiry].
Inquiry information appears.
BPress [Print Inquiry List].
Other User Tools
280
8
281
9. Appendix
Specifications for the Main Unit
❖Configuration:
Desktop
❖Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum
❖Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
❖Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
❖Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
❖Fusing:
Oilless belt fusing
❖Resolution:
600 dpi
❖Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
❖Original reference position:
Rear left corner
❖Warm-up time:
Type 1: 25 seconds or less (23°C)
Type 2: 29 seconds or less (23°C)
❖Originals:
Sheet/book/objects
❖Maximum original size:
A3L, 11"×17"L
Appendix
282
9
❖Copy paper size:
•Trays: A3L-A5K, 11"×17"L-71/4"×101/2"L
•Bypass:A3L-A6L, 11"×17"L-71/4"×101/2"L
• Bypass (custom size): Vertical: 90.0-305.0mm, 3.55"-12.00" Horizontal:
148.0-600.0mm, 5.83"-23.62"
•Duplex: A3L-A5K, 11"×17"L-101/2"L
•LCT: A4K, 81/2"×11"K
❖Paper weight:
• Paper Tray: 60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.
• Bypass: 60-253g/m2, 16-67lb.
• Duplex: 64-169g/m2, 17-45lb.
❖Non-reproduction area:
• Leading edge: 5±1mm
• Trailing edge: 2±1mm
• Left edge: 2±1mm
• Right edge: 2±1mm
❖First copy time:
•Type 1:
• Color: 8 seconds or less
• B&W: 4.9 seconds or less
•Type 2:
• Color: 7 seconds or less
• B&W: 4.5 seconds or less
❖Copying speed: (Type 1) Full Color / B&W
• 35/35 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"×11"K)
❖Copying speed: (Type 2) Full Color / B&W
• 40/45 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"×11"K)
Specifications for the Main Unit
283
9
❖Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
•Enlargement
• Full size
•Reduction
Zoom: From 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
❖Maximum continuous copy run:
999 sheets
❖Paper capacity:
• Tray1,2: 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Bypass tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Metric version Inch version
400% 400%
200% 200%
141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Metric version Inch version
100% 100%
Metric version Inch version
93% 93%
82% 85%
75% 78%
71% 73%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%
Appendix
284
9
❖Power consumption:
The complete system consists of the main unit, booklet finisher, large capacity
tray, file format converter, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface unit, and
USB Host interface unit.
❖Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):
670×670×760mm, 26.8"×26.8"×30.4"
❖Space for main unit (W × D):
Type 1,2: 910×670mm, 36.4"×26.8"
❖Noise emission:
Sound power level:
• Main unit only
• Complete system
Sound pressure level:
• Main unit only
Main unit only Complete system
Warm-up about 1.44 kW about 1.44 kW
Stand-by about 250W about 280 kW
During printing about 1.2 kW about 1.3 kW
Maximum about 1.44 kW about 1.44 kW
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by less than 44 dB(A) less than 44 dB(A)
Copying less than 66 dB(A) less than 67 dB(A)
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by less than 45 dB(A) less than 45 dB(A)
Copying less than 71 dB(A) less than 71 dB(A)
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by less than 32 dB(A) less than 32 dB(A)
Copying less than 52 dB(A) less than 53 dB(A)
Specifications for the Main Unit
285
9
• Complete system
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values mea-
sured in accordance with ISO 7779.
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are measured from the po-
sition of the bystander.
• The complete system consists of the main unit, auto document feeder, 2
tray paper unit, bridge unit, booklet finisher, and punch kit for the
booklet finisher.
❖Weight:
Type 1, 2: Approx. 110 kg, 242lb.
❖HDD:
80 GB or more
• Capacity for Document Server
36 GB
• Capacity for memory sorting
14-16 MB
• Capacity for others
8.7 GB or more
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by less than 33 dB(A) less than 33 dB(A)
Copying less than 61 dB(A) less than 61 dB(A)
Appendix
286
9
Specifications for Options
❖Exposure Glass Cover
Lower this over originals for copying.
❖Auto Document Feeder
Lower this over originals for copying.
•Mode:
ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Size mode, Custom Size
Originals mode, Auto detect (A4, 81/2"×11")
•Original size:
A3L-B6JISKL
Vertical: 128-297mm, 5.1"-11.7"
Horizontal: 128-432mm, 5.1"-17.3"
• Maximum number of originals:
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Dimensions (W×D×H):
570×520×135mm, 22.8"×20.8"×5.4"
•Weight:
Approx. 12kg, 26.4lb.
❖1000-sheet Finisher
Finisher Upper Tray:
•Paper siez:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL
•Paper weight:
52-260g/m2, 14-69lb.
• Stack capacity:
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,
81/2"×51/2"KL
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
Finisher Shift Tray:
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL
•Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14–43lb.
• Stack capacity:
No Staple:
• 1,000 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 500 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Specifications for Options
287
9
Staple:
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 10-50 sheets:100–20 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 10-50 sheets: 50-10 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-9 sheets: 50 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 10-30 sheets: 50-10 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Staple capacity:
• 2-30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Staple paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"KL
• Staple paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 16-24lb.
• Staple position
• 1 staples - 2 positions
• 2 staples - 2 positions
• Power consumption:
50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
• Dimensions (W×D×H)
520×520×790mm, 20.8"×20.8"×31.6"
•Weight:
Approx. 25kg, 55lb.
❖3000-sheet Finisher
Finisher Upper Tray:
•Paper siez:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L
•Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.
• Stack capacity:
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,
81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Appendix
288
9
Finisher Shift Tray:
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L
•Paper weight:
52-256g/m2, 14–68lb.
• Stack capacity:
No Staple:
• 3,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"×11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 1,500 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple:
• 2-19 sheets: 150 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 20-50 sheets: 150-60(A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-14 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 15-50 sheets:100-30 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-14 sheets: 100 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 15-30 sheets: 100-33 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size:
• 50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
With Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"×17"L / 81/2"×11"K)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Staple paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"KL
• Staple paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
• Staple position
• 1 staples - 3 positions
• 2 staples - 2 positions
• Power consumption:
96W (power is supplied from the main unit)
• Dimensions (W×D×H)
657×613×960mm, 26.3"×24.5"×38.4"
Specifications for Options
289
9
•Weight:
Approx. 54kg, 119lb.
❖Booklet Finisher
Finisher Upper Tray:
•Paper siez:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L
•Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43lb.
• Stack capacity:
• 250 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×11"KL,
81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 50 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Finisher Shift Tray:
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6JISL, A6L, 12"×18"L,
11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L
•Paper weight:
52-256g/m2, 14–67lb.
• Stack capacity:
No Staple:
• 2,000 sheets: A4K, 81/2"×11"K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 1,000 sheets: A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L,
81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×11"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 500 sheets: A5K (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 100 sheets: A5L, B6JISL, A6L, 81/2"×51/2"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
Staple:
• 2-12 sheets: 150 sets (A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 13-50 sheets: 150-40(A4K, 81/2"×11"K) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 10-50 sheets:100-20 sets (A4L, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"L) (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 2-9 sheets: 100 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 10-30 sheets: 100-33 sets (A3L, B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
Appendix
290
9
• Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size:
• 50 sheets: A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/2"×11"KL (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• 30 sheets: A3L B4JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L (80g/m2, 20lb.)
With Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets (A3L / A4K, B4JISL / B5JISK, 11"×17"L / 81/2"×11"K)
(80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Staple paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"KL
• Staple paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
• Staple position
• 1 staples - 3 positions
• 2 staples - 2 positions
• Saddle stitch
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4L, B5JISL, 12"×18"L, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"L
• Saddle stitching capacity:
2-15 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Stack capacity:
2-5 sheets: 30 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
6-10 sheets: 15 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
11-15 sheets: 10 sets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
•Folding:
Center folding
•Paper weight:
64-90g/m2, 17-24lb.
• Position:
1 position
• Power consumption:
96W (power is supplied from the main unit)
• Dimensions (W×D×H)
657×613×960mm, 26.3"×24.5"×38.4"
•Weight:
Approx. 63kg, 138.6lb.
Specifications for Options
291
9
❖Punch Kit (3000-sheet Finisher / Booklet Finisher)
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"KL
•Paper weight:
52-163g/m2, 14-43.4lb.
•Weight:
Approx. 2kg, 4.4lb.
❖2 Tray Paper Unit
• Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5K, 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,
81/2"×11"KL, 81/4"×14"L, 71/4"×101/2"KL, 8"×13"L, 81/2"×13"L,
81/4"×13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
•Paper weight:
60-216g/m2, 16-57lb.
• Paper capacity:
1,100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.) ×2 trays
• Power consumption:
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
• Dimensions (W×D×H):
580×620×260mm, 22.9"×24.5"×10.3"
•Weight:
Approx. 25kg 55.2lb.
❖Large Capacity Tray
• Paper size:
A4K, 81/2"×11"K
•Paper weight:
60-105g/m2, 16-28lb.
• Paper capacity:
2,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.)
• Power consumption:
Maximum 50W (power is supplied from the main unit)
• Dimensions (W×D×H, option unit):
580×620×260mm, 22.9"×24.5"×10.3"
•Weight:
Approx. 25kg, 55.2lb.
❖Bridge Unit
• Dimensions:
415×412×111mm, 16.4"×16.3"×4.4"
•Weight:
Approx. 5kg, 11lb.
Appendix
292
9
Information about Installed Software
expat
• The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter "software") installed on
this product uses the expat under the conditions mentioned below.
• The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of
the product including the expat, and the product manufacturer makes the ini-
tial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligations.
• Information relating to the expat is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark
Cooper.
Copyright © 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-
ject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPY-
RIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIA-
BILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
NetBSD
1. Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
Information about Installed Software
293
9
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
ARedistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
BRedistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
CAll advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
DNeither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contribu-
tors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-
CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT-
ED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTH-
ERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
2.Authors Name List
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software
that we have mentioned in this document:
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetB-
SD Project.
•This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
Appendix
294
9
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
•This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the Univer-
sity of California, Berkeley, and contributors.
Sablotron
Sablotron (Version 0.82) Copyright © 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Re-
served
a) The application software installed on this product includes the Sablotron software
Version 0.82 (hereinafter, "Sablotron 0.82"), with modifications made by the product
manufacturer. The original code of the Sablotron 0.82 is provided by Ginger Alli-
ance Ltd., the initial developer, and the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 has been
derived from such original code provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd.
b) The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the application
software of this product including the Sablotron 0.82 as modified, and the prod-
uct manufacturer makes Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer of the Sa-
blotron 0.82, free from these obligations.
c) The Sablotron 0.82 and the modifications thereof are made available under the
terms of Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (hereinafter, "MPL 1.1"), and the appli-
cation software of this product constitutes the "Larger Work" as defined in MPL 1.1.
The application software of this product except for the Sablotron 0.82 as modified is
licensed by the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).
Information about Installed Software
295
9
d) The source code of the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 is available at: ht-
tp://support-download.com/services/device/sablot/notice082.html
e) The source code of the Sablotron software is available at: http://www.ginger-
all.com
f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html
JPEG LIBRARY
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the In-
dependent JPEG Group.
SASL
CMU libsasl
Tim Martin
Rob Earhart
Rob Siemborski
Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
ARedistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
BRedistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
CThe name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or pro-
mote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For permission or any other legal details, please contact:
Office of Technology Transfer
Carnegie Mellon University
5000 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu
DRedistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowl-
edgment:
"This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carn-
egie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/)."
Appendix
296
9
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE
MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
MD4
Copyright (C) 1990-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-
Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the mer-
chantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
MD5
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as
the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such
works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-
Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the mer-
chantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
Information about Installed Software
297
9
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation
and/or software.
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)
For SMB transmission, this machine uses Samba ver 3.0.4 (hereinafter referred to
as Samba 3.0.4).
Copyright © Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILI-
TY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
Note
❒The source code for SMB transmission by this machine can be downloaded
from the following website:
http://support-download.com/services/scbs
RSA BSAFE®
• This product includes RSA BSAFE® cryptographic or security protocol soft-
ware from RSA Security Inc.
• RSA and BSAFE are registered trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
Appendix
298
9
Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to en-
dorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written per-
mission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowl-
edgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, IN-
DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS IN-
TERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEG-
LIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Information about Installed Software
299
9
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-
soft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the follow-
ing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific li-
brary, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "ht-
tp://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possess-
ing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any respon-
sibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-
CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-
FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, RE-
PAIR OR CORRECTION.
Appendix
300
9
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT-
TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN-
ERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCU-
RATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is re-
tained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLA-
RY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MIS-
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley
code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
Information about Installed Software
301
9
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
Appendix
302
9
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-
CIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
Information about Installed Software
303
9
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a li-
cence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights re-
served
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol de-
scription in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure
Shell".
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my di-
rect control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restric-
tively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed
from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
Appendix
304
9
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific li-
brary, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "ht-
tp://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possess-
ing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any respon-
sibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-
CABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-
FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, RE-
PAIR OR CORRECTION.
Information about Installed Software
305
9
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT-
TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GEN-
ERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCU-
RATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is re-
tained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLA-
RY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MIS-
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by
the University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley
code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
Appendix
306
9
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
Information about Installed Software
307
9
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPE-
CIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specif-
ic prior written permission.
Appendix
308
9
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILI-
TY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Soft-
ware"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright state-
ments and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each re-
vision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of
the license.
Information about Installed Software
309
9
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND
ITS CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-
TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP-
TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all
times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,
USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this document is granted.
310
INDEX
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB, 100
1 Sided to 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT, 100
2 Sided Print, 128
4 Color Graphic Mode, 188
A
About Address Book, 205
Accessing User Tools, 3
A.C.S. Priority, 119
A.C.S. Sensitivity, 119
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level, 201
Address Book: Change Order, 76
Address Book: Edit Title, 76
Address Book: Program / Change /
Delete Group, 76
Address Book: Switch Title, 76
Address Book Management, 76
Adjust Color Image / Copier / Document
Server Features, 119
Adjust Sound Volume, 121
Administrator Authentication
Management, 76
Administrator's E-mail Address, 69
Administrator Tools / System Settings, 76
ADS Background (Full Color), 119
AOF (Always On), 76
Append CR to LF, 194
Authentication Information, 214, 270
Authorized Reception, 160
Auto Color Calibration, 275
Auto Continue, 189
Auto Delete File in Document Server, 76
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs, 189
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs, 189
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 76
Auto Image Density Priority, 91
Auto Logout Timer, 57
Auto Off Timer, 57
Auto Specify Sender Name, 69
Auto Tray Switching, 91
B
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)
,
201
Background Numbering, 106
Back Margin: Left / Right, 100
Back Margin: Top / Bottom, 100
Backup File TX Setting, 125
Back Up / Restore Address Book, 76
Bidirectional Communication, 63
Bidirectional SCSI print, 64
Blank Page Print, 189
Box Setting, 121
Box Setting: Print List, 121
Box Settings, 172
Bypass Tray Setting Priority, 189
C
Capture Server IP Address, 69
Center Mark, 128
Change PDF Password, 197
Changing a Fax Destination, 226
Changing a Group Name, 265
Changing an E-mail Destination, 238
Changing an FTP Folder Destination, 248
Changing a Registered Name, 212
Changing a User Code, 216
Changing Fax Number, 227
Changing the Display Language, 276
Changing the registered SMB Folder
Destination, 244
Changing the User Parameters, 158
Channel, 66
Checkered Mark, 128
Checking the Wireless LAN Connection
,
12
Clearing the Counter, 222
Clearing the Number of Prints, 222
Color Profile, 196, 197
Color Registration, 275
Color Sensitivity, 119
Color Setting, 196, 197
Communication Mode, 66
Communication Page Count, 121
Compression (Black & White), 203
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)
,
203
Configuration Page, 185
Connecting the Telephone Line, 45
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface, 6
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface, 10
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface, 9
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b
(Wireless LAN) Interface, 11
Connecting to the Interface, 5
Connecting to the USB Interface, 8
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset
Timer, 57
Copier / Document Server Features /
Adjust Color Image, 119
Copier / Document Server Features /
Edit, 100
311
Copier / Document Server Features /
General Features, 91
Copier / Document Server Features /
Input/Output, 116
Copier / Document Server Features /
Reproduction Ratio, 96
Copier / Document Server Features /
Stamp, 106
Copies, 189
Copy Count Display, 47
Copy on Designating Page in Combine
,
100
Copy Order in Combine, 100
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91
Counter, 279
Courier Font, 194
Cover Sheet Tray, 51
Customize Function: Copier, 91
Customize Function: Document Server
Storage, 91
D
Data Format, 196
Data Security for Copying, 76
Date Stamp, 111
DDNS Configuration, 59
DDNS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64
Default Printer Language, 189
Default User Name / Password (Send)
,
69
Delete All Files in Document Server, 76
Delete All Logs, 76
Delete All Stored Print Jobs, 188
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs, 188
Delete Scanner Journal, 199
Deleting a Fax Destination, 229
Deleting a Group, 266
Deleting a Group Within Another Group
,
263
Deleting a NCP Folder Destination, 255
Deleting an E-mail Destination, 239
Deleting an FTP Folder Destination, 250
Deleting a Registered Name, 213
Deleting a scan size, 143
Deleting a Special Sender, 171
Deleting a User Code, 218
Deleting Fax Information, 147
Deleting Information Boxes, 179
Deleting Personal Boxes, 175
Deleting Transfer Boxes, 183
Delivery Option, 69
Density (Background Numbering), 106
Destination List Display Priority 1, 199
Destination List Display Priority 2, 199
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User
,
76
Displaying Names Registered in a Group
,
261
Displaying the Counter for Each User
,
219
Display Panel, 2
Display/Print Counter, 76
Divide & Send E-mail, 203
DNS Configuration, 59
Document Server, 120
Domain Name, 59
Domain Name (IEEE 1394), 64
Double Copies Separation Line, 100
Duplex, 189
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
(Page Numbering), 113
E
Edge to Edge Print, 189
Edit / Copier / Document Server
Features, 100
Effective Protocol, 59
E-mail Communication Port, 69
E-mail Destination, 236
E-mail Information Language, 203
E-mail Reception Interval, 69
E-mail Storage in Server, 69
Enable H.323, 134
Enable SIP, 134
Energy Saver Timer, 57
Enhanced Authentication Management
,
76
Erase All Memory, 76
Erase Border Width, 100
Erase Center Width, 100
Erase Original Shadow in Combine, 100
Error Log, 185
Ethernet Speed, 59
Extend A4 Width, 194
Extended Security, 76
F
Facsimile Auto Reset Timer, 57
Facsimile Features / General Features
,
121
Facsimile Features / Initial Settings, 134
Facsimile Features / Reception Settings
,
128
Facsimile Features / Scan Settings, 124
Facsimile Features / Send Settings, 125
Fax Destination, 223, 225
Fax E-mail Account, 69
Fax RX File Transmission, 69
File Transfer / System Settings, 69
Firmware Version, 76
Folder Destination, 240
Folder Transfer Result Report, 128
Font (Date Stamp), 111
Font Number, 194
Font (Page Numbering), 113
312
Font Pitch, 194
Font Source, 194
Format (Date Stamp), 111
Form Lines, 194
Forwarding, 128, 148, 161
Forwarding Mark, 151
Front Cover Copy in Combine, 100
Front Margin: Left / Right, 100
Front Margin: Top / Bottom, 100
Function Priority, 47
Function Reset Timer, 47
G
General Features / Copier / Document
Server Features, 91
General Features / Facsimile Features
,
121
General Settings / Scanner Features, 199
General Settings / System Settings, 47
H
H.323 Settings, 134
Hex Dump, 185
High Compression PDF Level, 203
Host Interface / Printer Features, 193
Host Name, 59
Host Name (IEEE 1394), 64
I
IEEE 1394, 64
IEEE 802.11b, 13, 66
Image Repeat Separation Line, 100
Initial Print Job List, 189
Initial Settings / Facsimile Features, 134
Input/Output / Copier / Document
Server Features, 116
Input Prime, 63
Inquiry, 277
Interface Settings / System Settings, 59
Internet Fax Settings, 134
Interpreting the configuration page, 186
I/O Buffer, 193
I/O Timeout, 193
IPv4 Address (IEEE 1394), 64
IPv4 Gateway Address, 59
IPv4 over 1394, 64
IPv6 Gateway Address, 59
IPv6 Stateless Address
Autoconfiguration, 59
J
Job End Call, 91
Job Separation, 189
K
Key Counter Management, 76
key Repeat, 47
L
LAN Type, 59
LDAP Authentication, 272
LDAP Search, 76
Letterhead Setting, 116, 189
List / Test Print Lock, 188
M
Machine IPv4 Address, 59
Machine IPv6 Address, 59
Machine Name, 59
Maintenance, 275
Maintenance / Printer Features, 188
Max. Copy Quantity, 91
Max. E-mail Size, 125, 203
Max. Reception E-mail Size, 69
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 116
Memory Lock, 162
Memory Lock Reception, 128
Memory Overflow, 189
Memory Usage, 189
Menu List, 185
Multiple Lists, 185
N
NCP Delivery Protocol, 59
Network, 59
Network Security Level, 76
Network Settings, 14
No. of Digits for Single Page Files, 203
Number of Scanner Resends, 69
NW Frame Type, 59
O
On Hook Mode Release Time, 121
Orientation, 194
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine, 100
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode, 91
Original Photo Type Priority, 91
Original Type Display, 91
Original Type Priority, 91
Output: Copier, 47
313
Output: Document Server, 47
Output: Facsimile, 47
Output: Printer, 47
Output tray settings, 50
P
Page Numbering, 113
Page Numbering in Combine
(Page Numbering), 113
Page Numbering Initial Letter, 113
Page Size, 189
Panel key Sound, 47
Panel Off Timer, 57
Paper Display, 91
Paper Tray, 128, 162
Paper Tray Priority: Copier, 51
Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile, 51
Paper Tray Priority: Printer, 51
Paper Type: Bypass Tray, 51
Paper Type: Tray 1-4, 51
Parallel Communication Speed, 63
Parallel Interface, 63
Parallel Timing, 63
Parameter Setting, 134
Parameter Setting: Print List, 134
Parameter Settings, 152
PCL Config./Font Page, 185
PCL Menu / Printer Features, 194
PDF Config./Font Page, 185
PDF Group Password, 197
PDF Menu / Printer Features, 197
Permit SNMPv3 Communication, 59
Permit SSL/TLS Communication, 59
Ping Command, 59
Point Size, 194
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings, 69
POP before SMTP, 69
Preset Stamp, 107
Print Address Book: Destination List, 76
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 199
Printer Auto Reset Timer, 57
Printer Bypass Paper Size, 51
Printer Features / Host Interface, 193
Printer Features / Maintenance, 188
Printer Features / PCL Menu, 194
Printer Features / PDF Menu, 197
Printer Features / PS Menu, 196
Printer Features / System, 189
Printer Features / Test Print, 185
Printer Language, 189
Print Error Report, 189
Printing the Box List, 184
Printing the configuration page, 186
Printing the Counter for All User, 221
Printing the Counter for Each User, 219
Print List, 67
Print Priority, 47
Print Reception Time, 128
Print Scanner Journal, 199
Program / Change Administrator, 76
Program / Change / Delete E-mail
Message, 69
Program / Change / Delete Gateway
,
134
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server
,
84
Program / Change/Delete LDAP Server
,
76
Program / Change /
Delete Scan Size, 124, 141
Program / Change / Delete Standard
Message, 125
Program / Change / Delete User Text, 47
Program Closed Network Code, 134
Program/Delete Stamp (User Stamp)
,
110
Program Fax Information, 134
Program Memory Lock ID, 134
Programming an End Receiver, 149
Programming/Changing Information
Boxes, 176
Programming/changing Personal Boxes
,
172
Programming/Changing Special Senders
,
163
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes
,
180
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special
Sender, 168
Programming the LDAP server, 85
Program Special Sender, 128
Program Special Sender: Print List, 128
PS Config./Font Page, 185
PS Menu / Printer Features, 196
Q
Quick Operation Key (1-3), 121
Quitting the forwarding function, 151
R
Ratio for Create Margin, 96
Reception File Print Quantity, 128, 161
Reception File Setting, 128, 139
Reception Protocol, 69
Reception Report e-mail, 140
Reception Settings / Facsimile Features
,
128
Registering a Fax Destination, 225
Registering a Group, 257
Registering a NCP Folder Destination
,
251
Registering an E-mail Destination, 236
Registering an FTP Folder Destination
,
246
Registering an SMB Folder Destination
,
240
314
Registering a Protection Code to a Group
User, 269
Registering a Protection Code to a Single
User, 267
Registering a User Code, 215
Registering Fax Information, 144, 145
Registering Folders, 240
Registering LDAP Authentication
,
270, 272
Registering Names, 210
Registering Names to a Group, 258
Registering SMTP Authentication, 270
Registering user names and destination
names, 210
Removing a Name from a Group, 262
Reproduction Ratio / Copier / Document
Server Features, 96
R / E Ratio, 96
R/E Ratio Priority, 96
Reserved Job Waiting Time, 189
Resolution, 194, 196, 197
Restore Factory Defaults, 66
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue, 116
S
SADF Auto Reset, 116
Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 57
Scanner Features / General Settings, 199
Scanner Features / Scan Settings, 201
Scanner Features / Send Settings, 203
Scanner Resend Interval Time, 69
Scan Settings / Facsimile Features, 124
Scan Settings / Scanner Features, 201
SCSI print (SBP-2), 64
Search Destination, 121, 199
Security Method, 66
Select Dial / Push Phone, 134
Selecting the Telephone Line type, 45
Selection Signal Status, 63
Select Punch Type, 116
Send Settings / Facsimile Features, 125
Send Settings / Scanner Features, 203
Separation Line in Combine, 100
Set Date, 57
Set Time, 57
Settings for the Document Server, 120
Settings Required to Use Document
Server, 33
Settings Required to Use Document
Server / Ethernet, 33
Settings Required to Use Document
Server / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 34
Settings Required to Use Document Server /
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
,
35
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /
Ethernet
,
21
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
,
23
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
,
24
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax, 17
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /
Ethernet, 17
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 18
Settings Required to Use Internet Fax /
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 20
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner, 31
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner / Ethernet, 31
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394), 32
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 32
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function, 25
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function / Ethernet, 25
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
,
26
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function / IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
,
27
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner, 28
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner / Ethernet, 28
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 1394
(IPv4 over 1394), 29
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 30
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
LAN-Fax, 14
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
LAN-Fax / Ethernet, 14
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
LAN-Fax / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)
,
15
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
LAN-Fax / IEEE 802.11b (wireless
LAN), 16
Setup IEEE 802.11b, 11
Setup Wireless LAN, 11
Shortcut R/E, 96
Signal Control, 63
Simplified Screen: Finishing Types, 116
315 EN USA B222-7857
SIP Settings, 134
Size (Background Numbering), 106
Size (Date Stamp), 111
Size (Page Numbering), 113
Slip Sheet Tray, 51
SMB Computer Name, 59
SMB Work Group, 59
SMTP Authentication, 69, 270
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, 128
SMTP Server, 69
Special Senders to Treat Differently, 159
Specifications, 281
Specifications for the Main Unit, 281
Specify Tray for Lines, 128
SSID Setting, 66
Stamp Color:1-4 (User Stamp), 110
Stamp Color (Background Numbering)
,
106
Stamp Color (Date Stamp), 111
Stamp Color (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Color (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp / Copier / Document Server
Features, 106
Stamp Format:1-4 (User Stamp), 110
Stamp Format (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Format (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp Language (Preset Stamp), 107
Stamp Position on Designating Page
(Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Position (Page Numbering), 113
Stamp Priority, 107
Stamp Setting (Date Stamp), 111
Staple Position, 116
Stored File E-mail Method, 203
Stored Reception File User Setting, 128
Sub Paper Size, 189
Superimpose (Date Stamp), 111
Superimpose (Page Numbering), 113
Switch Reception Mode, 128
Switch Title, 121, 199
Switch to Batch, 116
Symbol Set, 194
System Auto Reset Timer, 57
System / Printer Features, 189
System Settings / Administrator Tools
,
76
System Settings / File Transfer, 69
System Settings / General Features, 47
System Settings / Timer Settings, 57
System Settings / Tray Paper Settings, 51
System Status/Job List Display Time, 47
T
Test Print / Printer Features, 185
Timer Settings / System Settings, 57
To enter an identification name, 85
To enter a port number, 86
To enter a server name, 85
To enter the search base, 85
To enter the user name and password, 87
Tone: Original Remains, 91
To set authentication, 86
To set search conditions, 88
To set search options, 88
To start SSL communication, 86
To test the connection, 87
Transfer Log Setting, 76
Transmission Speed, 66
Tray Paper Settings / System Settings, 51
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2-4, 51
Tray Switching, 189
TWAIN Standby Time, 199
U
Update Delivery Server Destination List
,
199
User Authentication Management, 76
User Code, 214
User Stamp, 110
Using a Fax Destination as a sender, 227
Using SMB to Connect, 240
Using Utilities to Make Network Settings
,
36
W
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
,
201
Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF
,
201
Warm-Up Beeper, 47
WINS Configuration, 59
WINS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 64
Wireless LAN Signal, 66
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
The product names of Windows Server™ 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows® NT are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide
Type for C3535/DSc535/LD435c/Aficio MP C3500
Type for C4540/DSc545/LD445c/Aficio MP C4500
Type for C4540g/DSc545g/Aficio MP C4500G
EN USA B222-7857
